manual that are not on this vehicle. Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or.
300
2009 owner's manual
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don't drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2008 Chrysler LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer-oriented documents. You are urged to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts, and is interested in your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and the title.
VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
INTRODUCTION 7
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
2
A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Integrated Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Vehicle Security Alarm -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . 18 Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25 Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Remote Starting System -- If Equipped . . . . . . . 26 How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 47 Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Automatic Locking Mode -- If Equipped . . . . 49 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 50 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 75 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 2
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system consists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter with Integrated Key and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert the doublesided integrated key into the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON position.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1 -- LOCK 2 -- ACC (ACCESSORY) 3 -- ON 4 -- START
Integrated Ignition Key The Integrated Key (FOBIK) operates the ignition switch. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear of the RKE transmitter.
The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead. The valet key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep the valet key with you when valet parking.
To remove the valet key from the RKE transmitter, slide the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out of the RKE transmitter with your other hand.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
Valet Key Removal NOTE: You can insert the double-sided valet key into the lock cylinders with either side up. Ignition Key Removal Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the key.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: · For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
· For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit," under "Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in the "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) -- If Equipped," in Section 4.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don't leave the key in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder Opening the driver's door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC, sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.
SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to start the engine.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In 2
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid RKE transmitter to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
NOTE: · The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
· Exxon/Mobil SpeedpassTM, additional RKE transmitters, or any other transponder-equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional part is physically held against the RKE transmitter being used to start the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other Radio Frequency (RF) electronics will not cause interference with this system.
All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once an RKE transmitter is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE transmitters. Duplication of RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank RKE transmitter to the vehicle electronics. A blank RKE transmitter is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with you to an authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated keys, you can program new RKE transmitters to the system by performing the following procedure:
1. Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key.
2. Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key.
3. Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
and the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing, turn on again for three seconds, and then turn off.
The new integrated key is programmed. The Remote 2
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with integrated key, contact your authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system's memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM -- IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse; the headlights will flash; the park lights will flash; and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm the System Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is closed, or if all doors are closed, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that time, the Vehicle Security Light will flash. If it does not illuminate, the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming. In addition, if you open a door during the arming period,
the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming process. If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after closing the door, you must repeat one of the previouslydescribed arming sequences.
To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE: · The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
· The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, the alarm will sound.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
· When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
2
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously-described arming sequences has oc-
curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the
vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to "Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal and Approach Lighting If Equipped" under "Mirrors" in Section 3.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the "defeat" position (extreme downward position), unless the overhead map/reading lights are turned on manually.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld radio RKE transmitter with integrated key. The RKE transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the RKE transmitter with integrated key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
RKE Transmitter with Integrated Key
To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door, or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver's door or all doors on the first press of the 2
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:
· For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Remote Key Unlock," under "Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)," under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) If Equipped" in Section 4.
· For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the security alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the security alarm.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:
· For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to "Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock," under Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) If Equipped" in Section 4.
· For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security alarm. Opening a door with the security alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the security alarm.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC. Refer to "Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock," under "Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) If Equipped" in Section 4.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Lock the Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
2
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:
· For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to "Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock," under "Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) If Equipped" in Section 4.
· For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security alarm. Opening a door with the security alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the security alarm.
To Unlatch the Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: · The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on.
· You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key "Customer Key Programming."
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE: · Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the RKE transmitter. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
Battery Replacement 1-- Battery Access Door 2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place.
General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:
· Shift lever in PARK
· Doors closed
· Hood closed
· Trunk closed
· Hazard switch off
· Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
· Ignition key removed from ignition switch
· Battery at an acceptable charge level
· RKE PANIC button not pressed
To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE: · The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
· For security, power window and power sunroof op- 2
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
· The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time, or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position.
NOTE: · The ignition switch must be in the ON position in
order to drive the vehicle.
· For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the message "Insert Key/ Turn To Run" will flash in the EVIC until you insert the key. Once inserted, the message "Turn To Run" will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
Door Lock Plunger
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door, the door will lock. Make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING!
· For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as 2
well as when you park and leave the vehicle. · When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death. · Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don't leave the key in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition, ACC, or RUN position and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the key in the vehicle. Removing the key, returning the ignition mode to the OFF position, or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, the key is in the ignition LOCK, or ACC position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h), and
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:
· For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)" under "Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in the "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)," in Section 4 of this manual.
· For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position (do not start engine).
3. Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the 2
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked, and
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:
· For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to "Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit" under "Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in the "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)," in Section 4 of this manual.
· For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position (do not start engine).
3. Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws.
Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the valet key (or similar object) into the child lock control and pull it upward.
NOTE: For valet key information, refer to "A Word About Your Keys" in this section.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
Child Lock Control 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged, the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the valet key (or similar object) into the child lock control and pull it downward.
NOTE: · After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.
· For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the door lock plunger to the UNLOCK position, roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle.
Child Lock Control
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.
WINDOWS
Power Windows The window controls on the driver's door control all the door windows.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Press the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to "Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit," under "Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)" in the "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)," in Section 4 of this manual.
AUTO-Up Feature with AntiPinch Protection -- If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the power window switches will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
programmable. Refer to "Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit," under "Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)" in the "Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)," in Section 4 of this manual. 2
NOTE: · If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window.
· Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing.
Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors. To disable the window controls, press and release the window lockout button (setting it in the DOWN position). To enable the window controls, press and release the window lockout button again (setting it in the UP position).
Window Lockout Switch
Reset Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead, the AUTO-up function will be disabled. To reactivate the AUTO-up feature, perform the following procedure after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window switch up to close window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.
Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
2
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the switch will operate.
Trunk Release Button
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds.
With the ignition switch in the ON position, the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or the key removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid, near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
and passengers seated next to a window, and the optional supplemental front seat-mounted side airbags. If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size belts, your
seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child 2
restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Trunk Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, the front airbags for both the driver and front passenger, the optional supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
· It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best.
· Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
· Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in an accident, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2
Pulling Out the Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap. 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle
WARNING!
· A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. · A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. · A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
Removing Slack from Belt
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won't be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug. · A twisted belt can't do its job as well. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you can't straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it up or down to the position that fits you best.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position. When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
2
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision. These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). (Refer to information on Airbags in this section). Like the front airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) If the driver's seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver's seat belt is buckled. The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert Programming The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:
NOTE: Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating the BeltAlert.
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START, buckle the driver's seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver's seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt buckled.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
the seat belt.
2
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver's seat belt is unbuckled.
Automatic Locking Mode -- If Equipped In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking mode any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Seat belts
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
that have the Automatic Locking mode feature have a distinctive label on the webbing. Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
How to Engage the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will here a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive (Emergency) Locking mode.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
2
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
Front Airbag Components 1 -- Airbags 2 -- Knee Bolsters
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity.
WARNING!
· Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to open them. You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional. These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
· Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way.
· Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios etc.
This vehicle may also be equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next to a window and/or supplemental front seat-mounted side airbags.
If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags, they are located above the side windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seatmounted side airbags, they are marked with an SRS label sewn into the outboard side of the seat.
2
Window Airbag
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
SRS Label Location
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat-mounted side airbags, do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the seat airbags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
· If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat-mounted side airbags, do not attach cupholders or any other objects on or around the door. The inflating seat airbag could drive the object into occupants, causing serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the side curtain airbag. The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions.
· If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain airbags, do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the curtain airbags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side curtain and seat airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions, the front airbags will deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions. For vehicles so equipped, the supplemental side curtain airbag and front seat-mounted side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle will also trigger in moderate to severe side collisions. However, even in collisions where the airbags deploy, you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and younger should ride buckled up in the rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger 2
front airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
2. Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. (Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section.)
3. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
4. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section.)
5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
8. If your vehicle has supplemental side curtain airbags and/or supplemental front seat-mounted side airbags, do not lean against the door, as the airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door.
9. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section.
WARNING!
· Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the airbags won't deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags.
· Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
· If the vehicle has supplemental side curtain airbags and/or supplemental front seat-mounted side airbags, they also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following: · Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) · Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (if equipped) · Airbag Warning Light · Driver Airbag · Front Passenger Airbag · Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above Side Win-
dows (if equipped) · Supplemental Front Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (if
equipped) · Steering Wheel and Column · Instrument Panel · Interconnecting Wiring
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
· Seat Belt Reminder Light
· Knee Impact Bolsters
· Front Acceleration Sensors
2
· Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
How the Airbag System Works
· The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will not detect rollover.
· For vehicles so equipped, the ORC also determines if a side impact is severe enough to deploy the supplemental side curtain airbag and/or supplemental front seat-mounted side airbag as required for each type of impact.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
· The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and they will not inflate.
· The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for six to eight seconds as a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the
Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start-up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won't have the airbags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
· The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to
their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 ms. This is about half of the time that it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The driver's front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger's front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
· The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
· The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC (with side impact option) detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
inflate the side curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The airbag
inflates in about 30 ms (about one-quarter of the time 2
that it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
· The Supplemental Front Seat-Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC (with side impact option) detects a collision requiring the front seat-mounted side airbag to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front seat-mounted side airbag. The inflating front seat-mounted side airbag pushes through the seam in the seat's trim cover and opens into the space
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
between the occupant and the door. The airbag inflates at a very high speed and with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the front seat-mounted side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
· Do not make any modifications to the front seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover in any way.
· Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle.
· Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover.
· Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by Chrysler LLC/Mopar.
· At no time should any supplemental restraint system (SRS) component or SRS-related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler LLC/ Mopar.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front seat assembly, its related components, or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver or front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).
If a Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system. This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags, any or all of the following may occur:
· The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
· As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like 2
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.
· It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can't protect you in another collision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment, with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced Accident Response System performs the following functions: · Cuts off fuel to the engine. · Flashes hazard lights. · Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
· Unlocks the doors automatically.
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
· Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured because the airbags are not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
· It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material -- special handling may
apply.
See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in an impact. While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
· The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON.
· The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight 2
second interval.
· The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR) In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see the following list) in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration data during and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: 1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request. General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those maintained by the US government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database, provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that may be recorded:
· Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for electronically-controlled safety systems, including the airbag system
· Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
· Time of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
· Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
· Impact acceleration and angle
· Seat belt status
2
· Brake status (service and parking brakes)
· Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
· Engine control status (including engine speed)
· Transmission gear selection
· Cruise control status
· Traction/stability control status
· Tire Pressure Monitoring System status
Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time, including babies and children. Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child's size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
Infants and Child Restraints
· Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant carriers and convertible child seats.
· The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to "LATCH -- Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren)" in this section.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child 2
restraint anchorage system. Refer to "LATCH -- Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren)" in this section.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit the vehicle's seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
· Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
· The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible.
· Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position.
· If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1866SEATCHECK.
WARNING!
· Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
· A rearward-facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag, which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint:
· Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it.
· The restraint must be appropriate for your child's weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits.
· Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may not work when you need it.
· Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer's directions.
· When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
LATCH -- Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) Your vehicle's rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH 2
system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle's seat belts, instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle's seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats. You should NEVER install LATCHcompatible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle's seat belts.
LATCH Anchorages
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer's directions carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window. These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a 2
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: · Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
· When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the manufacturer's directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belts The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
Seat belts with an automatic locking retractor have a distinctive label on the seat belt webbing. The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed. Refer to "Automatic Locking Mode" in this section. A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor is activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing the webbing to retract back into the retractor. Tighten webbing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button, allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the 2
buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out.
If the belt still can't be tightened, or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still can't make the child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To attach a child restraint tether strap: 1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.
Tether Strap Mounting
1-- Cover 3-- Attaching Strap
A-- Tether Strap Hook B-- Tether Anchor
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. 2
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown under "Engine Oil", under "Maintenance Procedures" in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered as a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
· It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
· Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
· Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO) follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
2
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle
Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach Lighting -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 87
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse -- If Equipped . . . . . . 88 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Heated Power Mirrors -- If Equipped . . . . . . 89 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors -- If Equipped . . . 89 uconnect phone -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
uconnect phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Things You Should Know About Your
uconnect phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Voice Recognition System (VR) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . 118 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Power Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Heated Seats -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Driver Memory Seat -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . 130 Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . 131 Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Transmitter To The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped . . . . . . 137 Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 SmartBeams -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped . . . . 140 Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Fog Lights -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . 142 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 143 Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
3
Rain Sensing Wipers -- If Equipped . . . . . . . 146 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 147 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
-- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Adjustable Pedals -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 149 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . 156 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . 157 To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 To Set a Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . 162 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . 164 Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . 168 Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . 171 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Rear Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Garage Door Opener -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . 181 Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 185 Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Power Sunroof -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Opening Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Closing Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Venting Sunroof -- Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 3
Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Trunk Mat -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Load Leveling System -- If Equipped . . . . . . . 199
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window. The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror -- If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger-side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger-side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger-side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger-side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature -- If Equipped Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions, full forward, full rearward and normal.
Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer -- If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside rearview mirror. This feature is also available on the passenger outside mirror of mirrors equipped with turn signal and approach lighting.
Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal and Approach Lighting -- If Equipped Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal and approach lighting contain four LEDs, which are located in the upper outer corner of each mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Three of the LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the hazard flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The fourth (uppermost) LED supplies illuminated entry 3
lighting, which turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shines outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of the doors.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30 seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position.
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse -- If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver's view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into the REVERSE position. The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled through the customer programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Tilt Mirrors in Reverse" under "Customer-Programmable Features" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.
Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver's door trim panel next to the power door lock switch. A rotary knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position.
Power Mirror Control
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the power mirrors to pre-programmed positions. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in this Section for further information.
Heated Power Mirrors -- If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defrost. Refer to "Rear Window Features" in this Section, for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors -- If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
3
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
uconnect phone -- IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated uconnect phone. Refer to your "Navigation User's Manual" for uconnect phone operating instructions for these radios. Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate.
uconnect phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. uconnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands (e.g., Call" "Mike" "Work or Dial" "248-555-1212). Your cellular phone's audio is transmitted through your vehicle's audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone.
NOTE: · The uconnect phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile, Version 0.96 or higher. See the uconnect website for supported phones.
For uconnect customer support, visit the following websites:
· www.chrysler.com/uconnect
· www.dodge.com/uconnect
· www.jeep.com/uconnect
· or call 18778558400
uconnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone for private conversation.
The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth "Hands-Free Profile" cellular phone. uconnect features Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle's uconnect phone. The uconnect phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or French languages.
Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system (depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped), and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button) that will enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the "Operation" section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
The uconnect phone can be used with any Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone. See the uconnect website for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset Profile) you may not be able to use any uconnect phone
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the 3
phone manufacturer for details.
The uconnect phone is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume of the uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios.
Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most uconnect phone prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options.
· Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt.
· For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing, the following compound command can be said: Setup Phone Pairing.
· For each feature explanation in this section, only the combined form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the combined form voice command Phonebook New Entry, or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands:
Phonebook and New Entry. Please remember, the uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree Refer to "Voice Tree" in this section.
Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say Help following the beep. The uconnect phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the uconnect phone from idle, simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions. All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command At any prompt, after the beep, you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone Owner's Manual. The uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions:
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Setup Phone Pairing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
· When prompted, after the beep, say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts.
· You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any 3
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process.
· For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name.
· You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven, with one being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your uconnect phone. However, at any given time, only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to your uconnect phone. The priority allows the uconnect phone to know which cellular
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the uconnect phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Dial.
· The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call.
· For example, you can say 234-567-8901.
· The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say "Call.
· The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, you can say John Doe, where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook, in the phonebook.
· The uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the uconnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Phonebook New Entry.
· When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended. For example, say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
· When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Home, Work, Mobile, or Pager). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry, if desired.
· When prompted, recite the phone number for the 3
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu.
The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported by your phone, uconnect phone automatically downloads your cellular phone's phonebook.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, uconnect phone automatically downloads names (text names) and number entries from the cellular phone's phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature. See uconnect website for supported phones.
· To call a name from downloaded (or uconnect) Phonebook, follow the procedure in "Call by Saying a Name" section.
· Automatic download and update, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the uconnect phone, for example, after you start the vehicle.
· A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the uconnect phone.
· Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use.
· Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellular phone is accessible.
· Only the cellular phone's phonebook is downloaded. SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonebook.
· This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the uconnect phone. These can only be edited on the cellular phone. The changes are transferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection.
Phonebook Download -- Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone, uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth. To use this feature, press the PHONE button and say "Phonebook Download." The system prompts, "Ready to accept "V" card entry via Bluetooth..." The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone Owner's Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone.
NOTE: · The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
· Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth, and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy. In this case, the user must
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the uconnect phone, and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth. Please see your phone Owner's Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection.
· If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it 3
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries
NOTE: · Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
· Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Phonebook Edit.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit.
· Next, choose the number designation (home, work, cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
· When prompted, recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu.
Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number, but you can add "John Doe's" work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature.
Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Phonebook Delete.
· After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose. To select one of the entries from the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete.
· After you enter the name, the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you wish to delete.
· Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted.
· Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase "All" uconnect Phonebook Entries
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Phonebook Erase All.
· The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
· After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
· Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.
· Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the uconnect Phonebook
3
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Phonebook List Names.
· The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
· To call one of the names in the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button during the playing of the desired name, and say Call.
NOTE: The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call.
· The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the uconnect phone if the feature(s) are available on your cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the uconnect phone. Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone. Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial
or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section. To combine two calls, refer to Conference Call in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep, indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Conference Call When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.
3
Three-Way Calling To initiate three-way calling, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress. After the second call has established, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Redial.
· The uconnect phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the uconnect phone.
Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
· After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
· After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the uconnect phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone.
· An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
uconnect phone Features
Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using:
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to English, Espanol, or Francais.
· Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every uconnect phone language change operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable:
· Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect phone is operational, you may reach the emergency number as follows:
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say 3
Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
NOTE: · The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· If supported, this number may be programmable on some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button and say `Setup', followed by `Emergency'.
· The uconnect phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations, when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone.
Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance:
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Towing Assistance.
NOTE: · The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico).
· If supported, this number may be programmable on some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button and say "Setup", followed by "Towing Assistance".
Paging To learn how to page, refer to Working with Automated Systems. Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies, which time out a little too soon to work properly with the uconnect phone.
Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to Working with Automated Systems.
Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your uconnect phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service, such as a paging service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some instances, that may be too quick for use of the uconnect phone.
When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed by the word Send. For example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
6 #), you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say, 3 7 4 6 # Send. Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by Send, is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
3
You can also send stored uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say, "Send." The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. The uconnect phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE: · You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts The "Voice Recognition" button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately. For example, if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone, clear a..., you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say, Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices (e.g., the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Setup Confirmations. The uconnect phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your cellular phone, the uconnect phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone. The status is given for roaming, network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone (while dialing via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle's audio system. The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF) When you mute the uconnect phone, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In order to mute the uconnect phone:
· Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
· Following the beep, say Mute.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
In order to un-mute the uconnect phone: · Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button. · Following the beep, say Mute off.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
3
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Transfer Call.
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the uconnect phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone and the uconnect phone, follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User's Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Phone Pairing."
· When prompted, say List Phones.
· The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority. To "select" or "delete" a paired phone being announced, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say "Select" or "Delete." Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to "select" or "delete" a paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the uconnect phone.
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts.
· You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select.
· The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the uconnect phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near (approximately within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete uconnect phone Paired Cellular Phones
· Press the PHONE button to begin.
· After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Setup Phone Pairing.
· At the next prompt, say Delete and follow the prompts.
· You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone
uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the PHONE button and say "uconnect Tutorial."
Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the uconnect
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
From outside the uconnect phone mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
3
· Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for
five seconds until the session begins, or,
· Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the Setup, Voice Training command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the uconnect phone. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
· For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1/2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
· Always wait for the beep before speaking.
· Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
· Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period.
· Performance is maximized under:
· low-to-medium blower setting,
· low-to-medium vehicle speed,
· low road noise,
· smooth road surface,
· fully closed windows,
· dry weather condition.
· Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
· When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say Send.
· Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
· It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the uconnect phonebook.
· Phonebook (Downloaded and uconnect phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.
· You can say O (letter O) for 0 (zero). 800 must be spoken eight-zero-zero.
· Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported.
· In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
· Audio quality is maximized under:
· low-to-medium blower setting,
· low-to-medium vehicle speed,
· low road noise,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
· smooth road surface,
· fully closed windows,
· dry weather conditions, and
· operation from the driver's seat.
3
· Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the uconnect phone.
· Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
· In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the uconnect phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode.
Power-Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary zero one two three four five six seven eight nine star (*) plus (+) pound (#) add location all
Voice Commands Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
Primary language list names list phones mobile mute mute off new entry no pager pair a phone phone pairing phonebook previous record again redial
Voice Commands Alternate(s)
pairing phone book
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
3
set up
phone settings or phone set up
towing assistance
transfer call
uconnect Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
· Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) -- IF EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation This Voice Recognition system allows you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
When you press the VR button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options, press the VR button, listen for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking is known as "barging in." The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands. This will become helpful once you start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words "Cancel", "Help", or "Main Menu".
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
These commands are universal and can be used from any menu. All other commands can be used depending upon the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the 3
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR button and say "Help" or "Main Menu".
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Commands The Voice Recognition system understands two types of commands. Universal commands are available at all times. Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button.
2. Say a command (e.g., "Help").
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recognition system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for VR is different than the audio system.
Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button. You may say "Main Menu" to switch to the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
· "Radio" (to switch to the radio mode) · "Disc" (to switch to the disc mode) · "Memo" (to switch to the memo recorder) · "System Setup" (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave -- If Equipped) To switch to the AM band say "AM" or "Radio AM". In this mode, you may say the following commands: · "Frequency" (to change the frequency) · "Next Station" (to select the next station) · "Previous Station" (to select the previous station) · "Radio Menu" (to switch to the radio menu) · "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM To switch to the FM band say "FM" or "Radio FM". In this mode, you may say the following commands:
· "Frequency" (to change the frequency)
· "Next Station" (to select the next station)
· "Previous Station" (to select the previous station)
· "Radio Menu" (to switch to the radio menu)
· "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say "Sat" or "Satellite Radio". In this mode, you may say the following commands:
· "Channel Number" (to change the channel by its spoken number)
· "Next Channel" (to select the next channel)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
· "Previous Channel" (to select the previous channel)
· "List Channel" (to hear a list of available channels)
· "Select Name" (to say the name of a channel)
· "Radio Menu" (to switch to the radio menu)
3
· "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)
Disc To switch to the disc mode say "Disc". In this mode, you may say the following commands:
· "Track" (#) (to change the track)
· "Next Track" (to play the next track)
· "Previous Track" (to play the previous track)
· "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say "Memo". In this mode, you may say the following commands:
· "New Memo" (to record a new memo) -- During the recording you may press the VR button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:
- "Save" (to save the memo)
- "Continue" (to continue recording)
- "Delete" (to delete the recording)
· "Play Memos" (to play previously recorded memos) -- During the playback you may press the VR button to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:
- "Repeat" (to repeat a memo)
- "Next" (to play the next memo)
- "Previous" (to play the previous memo)
- "Delete" (to delete a memo) · "Delete All" (to delete all memos)
System Setup To switch to system setup say "Setup". In this mode, you may say the following commands: · "Language German" · "Language Dutch" · "Language Italian" · "Language English" · "Language French" · "Language Spanish" · "Tutorial" · "Voice Training"
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR button first and wait for the beep before speaking the "Barge In" commands.
Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the VR button, say "System Setup" and once you are in that menu then say "Voice Training." This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by uconnect phone. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. 3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Power Seats The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver's seat up or down, forward or rearward or to recline the seat. The passenger's seat will move up or down, forward or rearward.
Power Seat Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the seat.
3
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls.
Power Reclining Seats The recline control is used to adjust the position of the seatback. To adjust the seatback forward, move the control toward the front of the vehicle. To move the seatback rearward, move the control toward the rear of the vehicle.
Power Seat Recline Switch
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Lumbar Support This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.
Lumbar Support Control Lever
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear. Adjust the restraint so that the upper edge is as high as practical. To raise it, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower it, press the button on the post guide and push downward on the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Heated Seats -- If Equipped This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.
The controls for each front seat are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel.
3
Adjustable Head Restraint
Front Heated Seat Switch
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seats closest to the doors are heated. The controls for these seats are located on the rear of the center console.
Rear Heated Seat Switch
Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off. Two indicators will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for Off.
If the High-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to Low-level heating after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the Low-level setting also turns Off automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
WARNING!
· Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
· Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
3
Folding Rear Seats When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
· Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
· The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in an accident. Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT -- IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the unlock button is pressed.
NOTE: Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions.
The memory switch is located on the driver's door trim panel. The switch contains an (S) button to activate the memory save function. It also contains a rocker switch labeled with the number (1) and the number (2). The rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the appropriate side of the switch.
Memory Switch Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory.
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1. Turn your ignition to the ON position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET (S) button on the memory 3
switch.
4. Within five seconds, press and release the memory button 1 or 2. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped) will display which memory position has been set.
NOTE: · Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
· The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature can be enabled through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to "Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.
Linking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter to the Memory Feature Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:
1. Remove key from ignition.
2. Select desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press and release the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 or 2
accordingly. Memory Profile Set" (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC.
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds.
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: · The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi-
tions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC (if equipped).
· The driver's seat belt must be unbuckled to recall memory positions.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver's door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver's door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver's door during a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat Only) This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
3
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the key from the ignition switch.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· When you remove the key from the ignition switch, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
· When you remove the key from the ignition switch, the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
· The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or disabled through the programmable features in the EVIC. Refer to "Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit," under "Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood.
3
Hood Release Lever
Hood Safety Catch
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in the open position.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood, until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision. You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru-
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Automatic Headlights -- If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO (A) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights 3
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO (A) position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only) When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to "Headlights On with Wipers," under "Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.
SmartBeams -- If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
To Activate
1. Select "Automatic High Beams -- ON" through the EVIC. Refer to "Automatic High Beams," under "Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.
2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO (A) position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to "Multifunction Lever" in this section.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Deactivate Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the SmartBeam system.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights from the high beam to the low beam position.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO (A) to the ON position.
NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.
Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights, park lights, or ignition switch 3
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC. Refer to "Delay Turning Headlights Off," under "Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights -- If Equipped The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON, the headlights are off and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving.
Lights-On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is opened.
Fog Lights -- If Equipped The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Moving the multifunction lever up or down also causes the corresponding turn signal indicator in the outside mirror (if so equipped) to flash. For details, refer to "Outside Mirrors with Turn Signal & Approach Lighting" under "Mirrors" in this Section.
3
You can also signal a lane change by moving the multifunction lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent. Releasing the lever at the detent will provide three flashes.
If either indicator has a very fast flash rate, check for an inoperative outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the multifunction lever is moved, see your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: A "Turn Signal On" message will appear in the EVIC (if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-to-Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the multifunction lever is released.
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light off. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Overhead Console Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch.
Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel. With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and, if so
equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets and cupholders.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position.
3
Interior Light Defeat (OFF) Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature) Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
position. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent, past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the end of the multifunction lever to select the desired delay interval. There are six delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.
Mist Feature Lightly push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering column) to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the multifunction lever.
Windshield Washers To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward completely (toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is 3
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto Headlights Only) When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to "Headlights On with
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Wipers," under "Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.
Rain Sensing Wipers -- If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the six intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 6 is the most sensitive. Choose setting 3 or 4 for normal rain conditions. Choose setting 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity. Choose setting 5 or 6 if you desire more sensitivity. Place the multifunction lever in the off position when not using the system.
NOTE: · The rain sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
· The rain sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
· Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance.
· The rain sense feature can be turned on and off through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to "Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.
The rain sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the following conditions:
· Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit -- The rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is first switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises above freezing.
· Neutral Wipe Inhibit -- The rain sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON, and the transmission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
3
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the control handle inward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN -- IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as desired.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to pre-programmed positions. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in this section.
WARNING!
Moving the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
wheel. The switch is located on the front side of the driver's seat cushion side shield.
3
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS -- IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering
Adjustable Pedals Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward (toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward (toward the driver).
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
· The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
· The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is on. One of the following messages will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped) if a pedal adjustment is attempted when the system is locked out: "Adjustable Pedal Disabled -- Cruise Control Engaged" or "Adjustable Pedal Disabled -- Vehicle In Reverse."
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to preprogrammed positions. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in this section.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal's path.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control lever located on the right side of the steering wheel operates the system.
1 -- CANCEL 2 -- RESUME ACCEL 3 -- ON/OFF 4 -- SET DECEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
To Activate Push and release the ON/OFF button located on the end of the Electronic Speed Control lever. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the speed
control system is on. To turn the system off, push and 3
release the ON/OFF button again. The system and the indicator light will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the lever downward to SET DECEL and release. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: · Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd, 4th,
or 5th gear when in the Autostick mode (if equipped).
· The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact spare tire.
To Deactivate The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without erasing the memory if you:
· Softly tap the brake pedal,
· Depress the brake pedal, or
· Pull the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you to CANCEL.
Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the previous set speed. To do so, push the lever upward to RESUME ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the Electronic Speed Control lever in RESUME ACCEL. When the Electronic Speed Control lever is released, a new set speed will be established.
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped speed increases, so tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set, push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control lever in SET DECEL. Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is reached, and a new set speed will be established.
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DECEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped, speed decreases.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains 3
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
The automatic transmission will downshift while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control. An accident could be the result. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) -- IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes an infrared sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE: · If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
· If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
· Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver's responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury.The ACC system:
· Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (i.e., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
WARNING! (Continued) · Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions
into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.
· Does not predict the lane curvature or the move- 3
ment of preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes. · Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings. · May not detect a vehicle ahead when strong light (for example, sunrise or sunset) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle. · Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle's braking capability, and will not bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system: · When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones). · When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes; and when towing a trailer. · When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed. Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes.
· Adaptive cruise control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
· Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section. Note: The system will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the control lever. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation The speed control lever (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
1 -- DISTANCE SETTING 2 -- CANCEL 3 -- RESUME/ACCEL 4 -- ON/OFF/MODE 5 -- SET/DECEL
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays "ACC READY."
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays "CRUISE
OFF."
3
NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
conditions:
· When you apply the brakes.
· When the parking brake is set.
· When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL.
· When the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is switched off.
· When pushing the RESUME/ACCEL switch without a previously set speed in memory.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Activate Push and release the ON/OFF/MODE button located on the end of the speed control lever. The ACC menu in the EVIC displays "ACC READY."
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.
To Set a Desired Acc Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the lever downward (SET/DECEL) and release. The EVIC will display the set speed.
To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF/ MODE button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the EVIC will display "CRUISE OFF."
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
· The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
3
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
· The message "DRIVER OVERRIDE" will display in the EVIC.
To Cancel The system will disable ACC without erasing the memory if:
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· You softly tap the brake pedal. · You depress the brake pedal. · You pull the speed control lever toward you to CAN-
CEL. · The Electronic Stability Program/Traction Control
System (ESP/TCS) activates.
To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:
· You push and release the ON/OFF/MODE button.
· You turn OFF the ignition.
· You switch off ESP.
To Resume Speed Push the lever upward (RESUME/ACCEL) and release. Then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set speed.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. This could cause an accident and/or serious injury.
To Vary the Speed Setting While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by lifting and holding the lever up (RESUME/ACCEL). If the lever is continually held, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the lever is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC display.
Tapping the lever up once will result in a 1 mph (1 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the lever results in an increase of 1 mph (1 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
pushing and holding the lever down (SET/DECEL). If
the lever is continually held, the set speed will continue
to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the lever
is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
EVIC display.
3
Tapping the lever down once will result in a 1 mph (1 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph (1 km/h).
NOTE: · When you use the lever to decelerate, if the engine's
braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
· The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
Setting the Following Distance in ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between long, medium, and short. Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
1 -- Sensor Bars. Default Distance Setting is Three Bars = Long.
To change the distance setting, push the lever away from you (DISTANCE) and release. Each time this is done, the distance setting adjusts between long, medium, and short.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the EVIC displays the "Sensed Vehicle Indicator" icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
· The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed.
· The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor.
· The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph (24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages itself.
· The distance setting is changed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
· The system disengages. (Refer to the information on ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
3
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert "ATTENTION" will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The information it displays depends on ACC system status.
Menu Button
Press the MENU button (located on the steering wheel) repeatedly until one of the following displays in the EVIC:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
CRUISE OFF
- When ACC is deactivated, the display will read "CRUISE OFF."
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
ACC READY - When ACC is activated, the display will read "ACC
READY."
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC SET - When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
The set speed will continue to display in place of the odometer reading when changing the EVIC display while ACC is set.
1 -- Sensed Vehicle Indicator
2 -- Set Speed
3 -- Your Vehicle
4 -- Following Distance Setting: Three Bars = Long; Two Bars = Medium; One Bar = Short.
The ACC SET screen will display once again if any ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
· Set speed change · Distance setting change · System cancel · Acquisition/loss of Target
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
· Driver override
· System off
· Proximity warning
· ACC warning
3
The EVIC will return to the last display selected
after five seconds of no ACC activity.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Display Warnings and Maintenance
ACC Blinded Warning The ACC Blinded Warning will display when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow, fog, heavy rain, or when driving into direct sunlight (sunrise or sunset). The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC will display "ACC Blinded" and the system will deactivate.
NOTE: If the ACC Blinded Warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For additional information refer to "Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode" in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located behind the grille, slightly offset from the center of the grille.
ACC Sensor Location To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
· Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens.
· Do not remove any screws from the sensor or the
sensor mount. Doing so could cause an ACC system 3
malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.
· If the sensor is damaged due to an accident, see your authorized dealer for service.
· Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the "CRUISE OFF" state and will resume function by simply reactivating it.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation.
ACC Unavailable Warning If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays ACC UNAVAILABLE, there may be a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service ACC Warning If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays "SERVICE ACC," it indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving with ACC In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.
Adding a Trailer Hitch The weight of a trailer hitch may affect the performance of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance following the installation of a hitch, such as reduced detection range, please see your authorized dealer for service.
Offset Driving ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
3
Turns and Bends In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an appropriate speed while driving in curves.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC on Hills When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the system's response to signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of dramatic hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service.
Lane Changing ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it will not until it may be too late to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
3
Narrow Vehicles Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There will not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects and Vehicles ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
General Information
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Classification Specifications: 21 C.F.R part 1040.10 & 1040.11
DIN EN 60825-1:2003 IEC 60825-1:2001
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode In addition to adaptive cruise control mode, a normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal cruise control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
To change modes, press and hold the ON/OFF/MODE button for at least one second in either the OFF state or the READY state. Normal Cruise Ready will be displayed once the mode becomes available. To switch back to ACC, press and hold the "ON/OFF/MODE" button again for at least one second.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
WARNING!
In the normal cruise control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
3
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-
vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a
safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected.
To set a Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, tap the lever down and release ("SET/DECEL"). The EVIC will display the set speed.
NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or changing speed, not the speedometer.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary the Speed Setting There are two ways to change the set speed:
· Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the desired speed and push the lever down ("SET/ DECEL").
· Tap the stalk up ("ACCEL") or down ("DECEL") to increase or decrease the set speed in 1 mph (1 km/h) increments respectively. Hold for 5 mph (10 km/h) increments.
To Cancel The system will disable Normal cruise control without erasing the memory if:
· You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
· You pull the speed control lever toward you ("CANCEL").
· The Electronic Stability Program/Traction Control System (ESP/TCS) activates.
To Resume Push the lever up and release ("RESUME/ACCEL") and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set speed.
To Turn Off The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:
· You push and release the "ON/OFF/MODE" button.
· You turn off the ignition.
· You switch off ESP.
If the cruise control system is turned off and reactivated, the system will return to the Vehicle-to-vehicle (adaptive) distance control mode.
REAR PARK ASSIST The Rear Park Assist is a driver aid that senses for obstacles behind the vehicle. Refer to the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes in this section for system limitations and usage recommendations.
The Rear Park Assist is active when the driver shifts the transmission into the REVERSE position, and the parking brake is not applied, and the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
The system can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) when the vehicle is in PARK. Refer to "Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
The system uses four sensors located in the rear bumper to scan for obstacles up to 79 in (200 cm) away from the rear bumper fascia. The warning display located above the rear window provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object.
3
Rear Park Assist LED Display
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The warning display contains two sets of yellow and red indicators, one set to warn of obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the vehicle. The driver can view the indicators either through the rearview mirror or by looking at the display above the rear window.
The system dimly illuminates the two inner most yellow indicators when it is ON and detecting no obstacles. The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY INDICATOR
Inner LED 1st LED 2nd LED 3rd LED 4th LED
OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM:
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
79 in (200 cm)
51.2 in (130 cm)
45.3 in (115 cm)
31.5 in (80 cm)
39.3 in (100 cm)
25.5 in (65 cm)
33.5 in (85 cm)
INDICATOR COLOR
Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
Yes, Half Second No No No No
5th LED
20 in (50 cm)
27.6 in (70 cm)
Yellow
No
6th LED
16 in (40 cm)
19.7 in (50 cm)
Red
Yes, Intermittent
7th LED
6 in (15 cm)
11.8 in (30 cm)
Red
Yes, Continuous
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist will MUTE the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING!
· Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
WARNING! (Continued) · Before using the Rear Park Assist, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so 3
can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns the red indicators ON. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
· The Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
· The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver look over their shoulder when using the Rear Park Assist.
· Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of the system.
If "Service Park Assist System" appears in the EVIC after making sure the rear bumper is clean please see your authorized dealer.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights, an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink), storage for sunglasses, and an optional power sunroof switch.
NOTE: · Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the system operating properly.
Overhead Console Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/ reading lights.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time to turn off the light.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
3
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a push/push design. Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open. Push on the raised bar to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER -- IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle's battery.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console, and contain one, two, or three dots/lines designating the different HomeLink channels.
HomeLink Buttons NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
WARNING!
· Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a "stop and reverse" feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
· Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink
Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons, erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display "CLEARING CHANNELS." Release the buttons when the EVIC message states "CHANNELS CLEARED."
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLink.
3
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from "CHANNEL #
TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED."
Then release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons.
If the EVIC display states "DID NOT TRAIN" repeat Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer, in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you train.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button. If the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now state "CHANNEL # TRANSMIT."
If the EVIC display still states "CHANNEL # TRAINING" repeat Step 3.
NOTE: After training a HomeLink channel, if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed to the heading "Programming A Rolling Code System."
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "learn" or "training" button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door).
1 -- Garage Door Opener 2 -- Training Button
6. Firmly press and release the "learn" or "training" button. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the "Learn" button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are 3
designed to "time-out" in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator, replace "Programming HomeLink" Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release - every two seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The EVIC display will change from "CHANNEL # TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED."
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under "Programming HomeLink" earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states "CHANNEL # TRAINING." Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states "CHANNELS CLEARED." Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here are some of the most common solutions:
· Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
· Press the learn button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code.
· Did you unplug the device for training, and remember to plug it back in?
If you are having any problems or require assistance, please call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not 3
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF -- IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Controls
WARNING!
· Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
· In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
· Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof -- Express Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof will open automatically from any position. The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called "Express Open". During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof -- Express Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing, 3
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move toward the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed.
Venting Sunroof -- Express Press and release the V button in the center of the switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent", which operates regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to "Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit," under "Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.
Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12-Volt electrical outlets on this vehicle. Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
The 12-Volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray (if equipped with an optional Smoker's Package) has power available only when the ignition is ON. This outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
NOTE: If desired, the power outlet next to the ash receiver tray (if equipped) can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
3
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicles not equipped with the ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could result.
Front Power Outlet
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console outlet is powered directly from the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent engine starting.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death: · Do not use a three-prong adapter. · Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. · Do not touch with wet hands. · Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle. · If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Center Console Power Outlet
CAUTION!
· Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
· Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
· After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
CAUTION! (Continued)
· Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console.
Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows.
Front Seat Cupholders
Rear Seat Cupholders
STORAGE
Console Features The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items. For vehicles not equipped with navigation radio, the console also contains an extra storage bin located below the climate control, which holds up to four CD jewel cases.
Without Vehicle Entertainment System (VES) Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the armrest.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
3
1 -- Release button for bottom compartment 2 -- Release button for top compartment 3 -- Top Compartment 4 -- Bottom Compartment. (You can access this compartment directly, without first exposing the upper compartment, by operating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the armrest down.)
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12-Volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold various size coins). A slot in the left and right side of the top compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed. This feature is ideal for games, laptop's, cellular phones or other electrical equipment. The console's front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments.
With Vehicle Entertainment System (VES) The center console contains a large storage compartment. The storage compartment contains a 12-Volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold various size coins). A slot in the top left and right side of the storage compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the compartment with the lid closed. This feature is ideal for games, laptop's, cellular
phones, or other electrical equipment. The console's front-opening lid allows for easy access to the storage compartment for both the driver and the front passenger.
Cargo Area The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. · Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway. · Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
WARNING!
· Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
3
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
· The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
(Continued)
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and use seat belts.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Trunk Mat -- If Equipped A reversible trunk mat covers the bottom of the cargo area. The rubber side of the mat is used to protect the interior of the trunk from mud, snow, and debris. It provides a nonskid surface to keep cargo from sliding.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster The electric rear window defroster button is located on the climate control. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside rearview mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.
CAUTION!
· To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
· Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM -- IF EQUIPPED The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Instrument Cluster -- Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Instrument Cluster -- Premium . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
-- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Automatic All Wheel Drive (AWD) Displays -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228
4
Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
uconnect gps (Navigation) -- If Equipped . . 232
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Setting The Analog Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sales Code REQ -- AM/FM Stereo Radio And 6Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 238
Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 246
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 248
List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
AM/FM/CD/DVD Radio (RER/REN) If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Operating Instructions -- Voice Recognition System (VR) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Operating Instructions -- uconnect phone -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Sales Code RES -- AM/FM Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Operating Instructions -- Radio Mode . . . . . 256
Operation Instructions -- CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 264
Sales Code RES/RSC -- AM/FM Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Operating Instructions -- Radio Mode . . . . . 265
Operation Instructions -- CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 275 Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 275 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Connecting The iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Controlling The iPod Using Radio
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
uconnect studios (Satellite Radio) -- If Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 282 4
Selecting uconnect studios (Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Operating Instructions -- uconnect studios (Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Operating Instructions -- uconnect phone (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions -- Video Entertainment System (VES)TM (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Kicker High Performance Sound System With Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
uconnect studios (Sirius Backseat TVTM) -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Video Entertainment System (VES)TM -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Remote Sound System Controls -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
CD/DVD Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 293
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Automatic Temperature Control -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
4
1 - Air Outlet 2 - Instrument Cluster 3 - Hazard Switch 4 - Analog Clock 5 - Electronic Stability Program Off Button* / Traction Control System Off Button* 6 - Glove Compartment
7 - Radio 8 - Climate Control 9 - Heated Seat Switch* 10 - Power Outlet 11 - Ash Tray*
12 - Storage Compartment*
13 - Ignition Switch 14 - Hood Release 15 - Trunk Release Switch 16 - Headlight Switch * If Equipped
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER -- BASE
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER -- PREMIUM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Electronic Speed Control / Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator Light -- If Equipped
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control or Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is ON.
2. Low Fuel Indicator Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.
3. Front Fog Light Indicator -- If Equipped This light will turn on when the front fog lights are ON.
4. Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE: · A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
· Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
5. Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Odometer/Trip Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display -- If Equipped The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. Refer to "Trip Odometer Button" for additional information.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify the mileage the vehicle has been driven. Therefore, if the odometer
reading is changed because of repair or replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined.
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) / All Wheel Drive (AWD) Displays (Base Cluster) On vehicles equipped with a Base Instrument Cluster, the odometer will display "2drivE" when the vehicle is in Rear Wheel Drive (RWD), and "4drivE" when All Wheel Drive (AWD) is activated.
If the odometer displays the "tCASE" warning message after engine start up, or during driving, the AWD system is not functioning properly and service is required.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display "ALL WHEEL DRIVE" and "REAR WHEEL DRIVE" when the appropriate condition exists. The EVIC will display "SERVICE AWD SYSTEM" if the system is not functioning properly
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
and service is required. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in this section for more information.
Change Oil Message (Base Cluster) Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "Change Oil" message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 4
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster. To
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Cluster, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions exist.
Lo tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "Check Gascap" message will display in the EVIC. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in this section for more information.
7. Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area.
8. Engine Temperature Warning Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound to warn of an overheated engine condition. When this light turns on, the engine temperature
is critically hot. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as possible. (Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in Section 6 for more information).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
9. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light -- If Equipped This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not 4
functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on.
If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light
The yellow Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on when the key in the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The light should go out with the engine running. The system will turn this light on continuously while the engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP, the BAS or both.
11. Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is either not on during starting, or stays on, or turns on while driving,
then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
12. Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 4
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light -- If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
14. Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H," pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H," and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
15. Trip Odometer Button
Trip Odometer Button -- Base Cluster The word TRIP will appear when this button is pressed. Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the trip odometer displays to reset it to 0 miles (km). A second press of the button will display the outside temperature in the odometer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
Trip Odometer Button -- Premium Cluster
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter "A" or "B"
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to
reset it.
4
16. High Beam Light
This light will turn on when the high beam
headlights are ON. Push the multifunction lever
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
high beam.
17. Shift Lever Indicator This indicator shows the automatic transmission shift lever selection.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
18. Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. A chime will sound if the driver's seat
belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver's seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving.
19. Vehicle Security Light -- If Equipped The Vehicle Security Light flashes rapidly when the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming, and slowly when the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed.
20. Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check when the ignition switch is turned ON. This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Elec-
tronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible, place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key. The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. In this case, you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting.
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to 4
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
23. Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
24. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The OBD system monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when the key is in the ON position before engine start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
The MIL flashes to alert you to serious conditions that
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
4
25. Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible. A single chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure shown in Section 7.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) -- IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following: · System status · Vehicle information warning message displays · Tire Pressure Monitor System (if equipped) · Personal settings (customer programmable features) · Compass display · Outside temperature display · Trip computer functions · uconnect phone displays (if equipped) · uconnect gps system screens (if equipped) · Audio mode display
· Surround Sound Modes (If Equipped with DriverSelectable Surround [DSS])
The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel.
MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions, uconnect gps (if equipped), System Status, and Personal Settings.
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button also functions as a remote sound system conFUNC- trol. Refer to "Remote Sound System Controls" TION in this section. SELECT Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, uconnect gps (if equipped), System
Status Messages, and Personal Settings
SCROLL (Customer-Programmable Features). The Button SCROLL button also functions as a remote
sound system control. Refer to "Remote Sound
System Controls" in this section.
4
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with
compass reading and outside temperature, this
AUDIO screen will display radio and media mode MODE information depending on which radio is in the
Button vehicle. Refer to "Remote Sound System Con-
trols" in this section.
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages:
· Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with either turn signal on)
· Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
· Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
· Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
· Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
· RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
· Memory #1/#2 Profile Set
· Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall
· Memory System Disabled Vehicle Not In PARK (with a single chime)
· Memory System Disabled Seat Belt Buckled (with a single chime)
· Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK
· Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
· Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
· Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion)
· Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
· Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
· SERVICE AWD SYSTEM -- All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning properly and service is required.
· Normal Cruise Ready -- When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is turned off and Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in Section 3 (if equipped).
· Cruise Off -- When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is turned off. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in Section 3 (if equipped).
· ACC Ready -- When the ACC system is activated. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in Section 3 (if equipped).
· ACC Set -- After setting the desired speed in the ACC system. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in Section 3 (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
· ACC Cancelled -- To disable the ACC system. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in Section 3 (if equipped).
· Sensed Vehicle Indicator -- The system detects a
slower moving vehicle in the same lane. Refer to
"Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in Section 3 (if
equipped).
4
· Driver Override -- If you apply the accelerator after
setting the desired speed in the ACC system. Refer to
"Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in Section 3 (if
equipped).
· Distance Set -- After changing the desired following distance in the ACC system, this message will display momentarily. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in Section 3 (if equipped).
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Attention -- If the ACC system predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance, this message will flash and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in Section 3 (if equipped).
· ACC Blinded -- If the ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting conditions. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in Section 3 (if equipped).
· ACC Unavailable -- If the ACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction that limits functionality. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in Section 3 (if equipped).
· Service ACC -- If the ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault that requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)" in Section 3 (if equipped).
· Adjustable Pedals Disabled Cruise Engaged (with a single chime) -- only available on vehicles equipped with memory seats.
· Adjustable Pedals Disabled Vehicle In REVERSE (with a single chime) -- only available on vehicles equipped with memory seats.
· Channel # Transmit
· Channel # Training
· Channel # Trained
· Clearing Channels
· Channels Cleared
· Did Not Train
· Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to information on "Tire Pressure" and "Tire Pressure Monitor" under "Starting And Operating."
· Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to information on "Tire Pressure" and "Tire Pressure Monitor" under "Starting And Operating."
· Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to information on "Tire Pressure" and "Tire Pressure Monitor" under "Starting And Operating."
· Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to information on "Tire Pressure" and "Tire Pressure Monitor" under "Starting And Operating."
· Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to information on "Tire Pressure Monitor" under "Starting And Operating."
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
· Check Gascap (refer to "Adding Fuel" in Section 5)
· Service Park Assist System (with a single chime)
· Turn To Run (refer to "Remote Starting System" in Section 2)
· Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
Oil Change Required
4
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The "Oil Change Required" message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-
onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
· Average Fuel Economy
· Distance To Empty
· Trip A
· Trip B
· Elapsed Time
· Display Units of Measure in
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information.
· Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read "RESET" or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
· Distance To Empty (DTE) Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL. This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
· Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset.
· Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
· Elapsed Time
4
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
· Display Units of Measure in To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "US" or "METRIC" appears.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed function. (Reset ALL will display during this three-second window).
Automatic All Wheel Drive (AWD) Displays -- If Equipped Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside temperature, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions, when the vehicle automatically transitions from RWD to AWD the EVIC will display the following message for five seconds.
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) to All Wheel Drive (AWD)
When the vehicle automatically transitions from AWD to RWD the EVIC will display the following message for five seconds.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) to Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
Refer to "All Wheel Drive -- If Equipped" in Section 5 for more information on the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
COMPASS button to display one of eight com-
COM- pass readings and the outside temperature.
PASS
Button
4
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display "CAL" until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the "CAL" message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the "CAL" message does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approximately two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until "Calibrate Compass" displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration. The message "CAL" will display in the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the "CAL" message turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Cell Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Compass Variance Map 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approximately two seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
3. Press the SCROLL button until "Compass Variance" message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until
the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.
4
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until "Surround Sound" displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides information on the current surround mode.
· Stereo
· Audio Surround
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change surround modes.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
uconnect gps (Navigation) -- If Equipped
uconnect gps (Navigation) Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navigation displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On, the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu display is active, the SCROLL button can be used to scroll through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button can be used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to the previous menu. When the Map display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.
Turn-by-Turn Directions The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a programmed destination when Turn-by-Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn.
NOTE: Refer to your "Navigation User's Manual" for detailed operating instructions.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices.
"Language" When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the uconnect language selection. Refer to "Language Selection" under "uconnect phone" in Section 3.
"Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)" When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.
"Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit" When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
"Remote Key Unlock"
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver's
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen-
ger's doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
4
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
"Driver Door 1st Press" or "All Doors 1st Press" appears.
"Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock" -- If Equipped When ON is selected, you can use your RKE transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals (if equipped), power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets.
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When OFF is selected, only the MEMORY switch on the driver's door trim panel will recall memory profiles. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in Section 3.
"Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock" When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.
"Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers" -- If Equipped When ON is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. When OFF is selected, the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
"Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit" -- If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to "Easy Entry/Exit Seat" under "Driver Memory Seat" in Section 3.
"Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock" When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.
"Headlights On with Wipers" (Available with Auto Headlights Only) When ON is selected, and the HEADLIGHT switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the brightness, refer to "Lights" in Section 3.
"Delay Turning Headlights Off" When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "0," "30," "60," or "90" appears.
"Tilt Mirrors Down in Reverse" -- If Equipped When ON is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the transmission is in the REVERSE posi- 4
tion. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.
"Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock" When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "OFF," "30 sec.," "60 sec.," or "90 sec." appears.
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
"Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit" When this feature is selected, the power WINDOW switches, radio, uconnect phone (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "Off," "45 sec.," "5 min.," "10 min.," "30 min.," or "60 min." appears.
"AWD System Displays" When in this display you may select "ON" or "OFF". When ON is selected, the EVIC displays the current mode of the transfer-case. A five second display appears any time the transfer-case changes from All Wheel Drive (AWD) to Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) or from RWD to AWD. The EVIC also displays the current mode of the transfer-case when you shift into drive or reverse. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.
"Confirmation of Voice Commands" -- If Equipped When ON is selected, all voice commands from the uconnect system are confirmed. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.
"Park Assist System" -- If Equipped When ON is selected, the system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE or NEUTRAL position. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.
"Turn-by-Turn Navigation" -- If Equipped When ON is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears.
"Display Units of Measure in" The EVIC, odometer, and uconnect gps (if equipped) can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "US" or "METRIC" appears.
"Automatic High Beams" -- If Equipped When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. Refer to "SmartBeams" in Section 3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel, press and hold the button until the setting is correct.
4
Analog Clock
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE REQ -- AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK) NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.
REQ Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone -- If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "uconnect phone" in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With uconnect" message will display on the radio screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Phone Button uconnect phone -- If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "uconnect phone" in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With
uconnect" message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
4
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the "SET HOME CLOCK" entry. Once in this display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2.
INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
Program Type
16-Digit Character Display
No program type or undefined
None
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
Classical
Classicl
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
4
College
College
Country
Country
Foreign Language
Language
Information
Inform
Jazz
Jazz
News
News
Nostalgia
Nostalga
Oldies
Oldies
Personality
Persnlty
Public
Public
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Rock Soft Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues Sports Talk Top 40 Weather
16-Digit Character Display R&B
Rel Musc Rel Talk
Rock Soft Soft Rck Soft R & B Sports Talk Top 40 Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to select an entry and make changes.
· DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode, selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu (if equipped).
· DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
· DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following:
· Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc (if equipped).
· Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages (if supported on the disc) (if equipped).
· Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
NOTE: · The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
· These selections can only be made while playing a DVD.
·
VESTM Power - Allows you to turn VESTM ON and OFF (if equipped).
4
· VESTM Lock - Locks out rear VESTM remote controls (if equipped).
· VESTM CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
· Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save changes.
· Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language -- If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language (effective only if language supported by disc). If you want to select a language not listed, then scroll down and select other. Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.
Audio Language -- If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting other. Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language -- If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other. Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles -- If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On.
Audio DRC -- If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range. The default is set to High, and under this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal.
Aspect Ratio -- If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay -- If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
SET Button -- To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
4
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO) The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region. These region codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate "Disc Hot" and shut off until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button -- Loading Compact Disc(s) Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays INSERT DISC, insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and "READING DISC" when the radio is reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 43/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism.
Eject Button -- Ejecting Compact Disc(s) Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE) Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK 4
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE) Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE) Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF (CD MODE) Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE) Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
· Maximum number of directory levels: 8
· Maximum number of files: 255
· Maximum number of folders: 100
· Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
· Level 1: 12 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
· Level 2: 31 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/ WMA files). Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/ WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/ WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specification
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128,
4
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA Specifica- Sampling Fre-
tion
quency (kHz)
WMA
44.1 and 48
Bit Rate (kbps)
48, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192 VBR
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be affected by the following:
· Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
· Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
· Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the "Disc at Once" option before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play) Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play) Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume
down.
4
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode) No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode) No function.
Operating Instructions -- Voice Recognition System (VR) (If Equipped) For the radio, refer to "Voice Recognition System (VR)" in Section 3.
For uconnect "Voice Recognition System (VR)," refer to "uconnect phone" in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - uconnect phone (If Equipped) Refer to "uconnect phone" in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - uconnect studios (Satellite Radio) (If Equipped) Refer to "uconnect studios (Satellite Radio)" in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment System (VES)TM (If Equipped) Refer to separate "Video Entertainment System (VES)TM Guide."
Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTSTM DTSTM and DTSTM 2.0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
AM/FM/CD/DVD RADIO (RER/REN) IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit's faceplate.
The REN and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System (GPS)-based Navigation system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
Refer to your uconnect tunes (REN) or (RER) user's manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions -- Voice Recognition System (VR) -- If Equipped For the radio, refer to "Voice Recognition System (VR)" in Section 3.
Operating Instructions -- uconnect phone -- If 4
Equipped Refer to "uconnect phone" in Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
uconnect gps -- RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system's clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To Manually Set the Clock -- RER/REN
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where "User Clock" is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the word "Hour" with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen where the word "Hour" with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where the word "Min" with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the screen where the word "Min" with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where the word "Save" is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected, this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words "Daylight Savings." Touch the screen where the words "Daylight Savings" are displayed to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off When selected, this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words "Show Time if Radio is Off." Touch the screen where the words "Show Time if Radio is Off" are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words "Set Time Zone" are displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
4
want to select, touch the screen where the word "Page" is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word "Save" is displayed.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RES -- AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.
RES Radio
Operating Instructions -- Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
4
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button -- To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).
DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Operation Instructions -- CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play
NOTE: · The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
·
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
4
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s) Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
· This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism.
· Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism.
· RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded.
· Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
4
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
· Maximum number of folder levels: 8
· Maximum number of files: 255
· Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
· Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
· Level 1: 12 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
· Level 2: 31 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rate.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
MPEG Specification
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title 4
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.
Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:
· Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
· Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
· Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the "Disc at Once" option before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is OFF).
SALES CODE RES/RSC -- AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.
RES/RSC Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Operating Instructions -- Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME time to turn off the radio.
control knob a second
4
Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) -- If Equipped Refer to "Voice Recognition System (VR)" in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone -- If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "uconnect phone" in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With uconnect" message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button uconnect phone -- If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "uconnect phone" in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With uconnect" message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. 4
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits Classical Classic Rock College Country Foreign Language Information
Jazz News Nostalgia Oldies Personality Public
16-Digit Character Display
None
Adlt Hit Classicl Cls Rock College Country Language Inform
Jazz News Nostalga Oldies Persnlty Public
Program Type
Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Talk Rock Soft Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues Sports Talk Top 40 Weather
16-Digit Character Display R&B
Rel Musc Rel Talk
Rock Soft Soft Rck Soft R&B Sports Talk Top 40 Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
4
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
· Set Clock -- Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save changes.
AM/FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button -- To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).
DISC/AUX Button Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions -- CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play
NOTE: · The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
· This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s) Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
CAUTION!
· This CD player will accept 43/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
· Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism. · RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
4
a second CD if one is already loaded.
· Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types) The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
· Maximum number of folder levels: 8
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
· Maximum number of files: 255
· Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 4
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
· Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
· Level 1: 12 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
· Level 2: 31 (including a separator . and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.
Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:
· Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
· Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
· Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the "Disc at Once" option before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
4
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition is OFF).
Operating Instructions - uconnect phone (If Equipped) Refer to "uconnect phone" in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - uconnect studios (Satellite Radio) (If Equipped) Refer to "uconnect studios (Satellite Radio)" in this section.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) -- IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/ REL/RET radios only with uconnect. For sales code RER, REN, REP, REW or REZ touch-screen radio UCI
feature, refer to the separate RER, REN or REZ User's Manual. UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios.
This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle's sound system through a 16pin connector using the provided interface cable.
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple's website for software updates.
NOTE: · If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod, use the separate 16pin connector port (in the glove compartment on some vehicles).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
· Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle's 16pin connector port (which is located in
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the 4
iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle's UCI system (iPod may take a few seconds to connect), the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: · You may have to remove the connector pin protection
cap from the 16pin connector port, prior to connecting the cable.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· If the iPod battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the UCI system until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature By using the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle's UCI 16pin connector port:
· The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle's sound system, providing metadata (Artist, track title, album, etc.) information on the radio display.
· The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod contents.
· The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector.
Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI (iPod) mode and access a connected iPod, press the `AUX' button on the radio faceplate.
Once in the UCI (iPod) mode, iPod audio tracks (if available from iPod) start playing over the vehicle's audio system.
Play Mode When switched to UCI mode, the iPod automatically starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data:
· Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track.
· Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while playing a track, skips to the next track.
· Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, during the first two seconds of the track, will jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this button at any other time in the track, will jump to the beginning of the current track.
· Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button long enough will take you to the beginning of the current track.
· Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF >> button.
· A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
· Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will jump to the previous track in the list, if you press this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >> button during play mode, it will jump to the next track in the list.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
· While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see the associated metadata (Artist, track title, album, etc.) for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio.
· Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod 4
mode to repeat the current playing track.
· Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode, which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again. During Scan mode you can also press the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next tracks.
· RND button (available on sales code RES radio only): Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod. If the RND icon is showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
List Or Browse Mode During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod.
· TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod.
· Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display, press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display.
· During all List modes, the iPod displays all lists in "wrap-around" mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards (counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
· In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod.
· Preset 1 Playlists
· Preset 2 Artists
· Preset 3 Albums
· Preset 4 Genres
· Preset 5 - Audiobooks
· Preset 6 Podcasts
· Pressing a PRESET button, will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line.
· To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
· LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod. Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control knob. This will display the next sub-menu list item on the iPod then you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod sub-menu levels are available on this system.
· MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
CAUTION!
· Leaving the iPod (or any supported device) any-
where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation, or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturer's guidelines.
· Placing items on the iPod, or connections to the iPod in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
4
device and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving. Failure to following this warning could result in an accident.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
uconnect studios (SATELLITE RADIO) -- IF EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY) Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no additional charge. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) Please have the following information available when calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen. All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Selecting uconnect studios (Satellite) Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.
Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to 4
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped). Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons:
· The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle.
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.
· Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.
· Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions -- uconnect studios (Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button (When Equipped) Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
INFO Button -- Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the song title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display).
INFO Button -- REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
RW/FF Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary) Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button -- Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button -- REU Radio
4
Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up or down or scan the channels and
the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
Music Type screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down, and
scan will no longer be based on your selection.
SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items:
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Display Sirius ID number -- Press the AUDIO/ SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscription.
SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions -- uconnect phone (If Equipped) Refer to "uconnect phone" in Section 3.
Operating Instructions -- Video Entertainment System (VES)TM (If Equipped) Refer to separate "Video Entertainment System (VES)TM Guide."
KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
any stereo audio source. A new feature of the Kicker audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound for any audio source.
"Audio Surround" is optimized for front seat passengers for any audio source. This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or
AUX and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle 4
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to "Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.
DSS modes for audio sources are "Stereo" and "Audio Surround," which is surround sound equalized for the front seat occupants. Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of the original recording. Some audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When in "Audio Surround" mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available to add more surround audio if desired.
uconnect studios (SIRIUS BACKSEAT TVTM) -- IF EQUIPPED Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting technology to provide streaming video. The subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. SIRIUS Backseat TVTM offers three video channels for family entertainment, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.
Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)TM, RER Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for detailed operating instructions.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)TM -- IF EQUIPPED The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)TM includes the following components for rear seat entertainment:
· A diagonal 7 in (17.8 cm) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen integrated into the center console armrest. The screen features brightness control for optimum daytime and nighttime viewing.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
4
Opening the Rear Seat VESTM · The LCD screen swings up from the rear of the armrest
to allow the rear seat passenger(s) to view the display.
VESTM Video Screen NOTE: Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been raised to its viewing position.
· The radio and DVD player controls allow front seat operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear seat passengers.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· A battery-powered infrared remote control snaps into a molded compartment in the center console armrest upper storage bin.
VESTM Remote Control · Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen-
gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources.
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks) on the rear of the center console enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera, connect video games for display on the screen, or play music directly from an MP3 player.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)
NOTE: Refer to your "Vehicle Entertainment System (VES)TM Users Manual" for detailed operating instructions.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS -- IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o'clock positions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
The remote sound system controls are located on the surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o'clock positions.
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
display which is located in the instrument cluster.
4
VOLUME Button
The VOLUME button controls the sound level of the sound system. Press the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound level. Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to decrease the sound level.
Remote Sound System Controls
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen displays radio and media mode information AUDIO depending on which radio is in the vehicle. MODE Button
If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the mode will change (i.e. from AM to FM, to Media mode, etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle).
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/ Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT button to operate various radio, media, and FUNC- Universal Customer Interface (UCI) functions TION (i.e., advance presets, select next folder, jump to SELECT or start playing songs in playlists, etc., dependButton ing on which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI).
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/ Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters, SCROLL files, etc., depending on which radio is in the Button vehicle.
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily "clear" by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
4
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
Blower Control The rotary knob on the left controls the blower. The control has an OFF position and four speed settings. The blower will remain on until the control is turned to the OFF position or the ignition is turned OFF.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the "O" (Off) position.
Manual Temperature Controls
Temperature Control The rotary knob in the center controls air temperature. Rotate the control to the left for cooler air temperature and to the right for warmer air temperature. Rotating the control to the extreme left provides the coldest setting. Rotating the control to the extreme
right provides the warmest setting.
Mode Control
The rotary knob on the right controls airflow distribution. Dots between each of the mode selections identify intermediate modes that allow the operator to fine-tune airflow distribution. The mode settings are as follows:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
· Defrost Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles.
NOTE: To improve fuel economy, leave in defrost only
when necessary.
4
· Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles.
· Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
through vents under the front seats.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
· Bi-Level Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and through the outlets located on the
floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers can be closed to partially block airflow.
· Panel Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in the
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow.
· Recirculation Control The mode control knob also controls the recirculation feature. You can choose Bi-Level Recirculation air outlets, Panel Recirculation air outlets, or a mix or both while in this mode.
Normally, air enters from outside the vehicle. However, when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is
re-used. Use this mode to cool the inside of the vehicle rapidly. The Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on and turn off the air conditioning. When the air conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the
outlets selected with the mode control. Press this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning. An indicator in the button will illuminate when compressor operation is selected.
Automatic Temperature Control -- If Equipped
Automatic Temperature Controls Automatic Operation The Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning
the mode control knob (on the right) to AUTO, and place
the blower control knob (on the left) to either LO AUTO
or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for
front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should
be used when more airflow is desired, or when rear seat
occupants are present. Then, dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver
4
or passenger temperature control knob. Once the comfort
level is selected, the system will maintain that level
automatically using the heating system. Should the de-
sired comfort level require air conditioning, the system
will automatically make the adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic operation.
Air conditioning in this system is automatic. Pressing the air conditioning control button while in AUTO mode will cause the indicator in the control button to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the recirculation control button will temporarily put the system in Recirculation mode (10 minutes). This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the indicator in the control button to
illuminate. After 10 minutes, the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the indicator will turn off.
NOTE: · The surface of the climate control panel and the top
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the location of the climate control sensors. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system.
· Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begin to fog, press the recirculation button to return to outside air. Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features, which consist of blower preferred automatic, mode preferred automatic, or blower and mode preferred automatic. This means the operator can override the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired. The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the blower control knob (on the left).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
NOTE: Please read the automatic temperature control operation chart that follows for details.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the mode control knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
· Defrost Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles.
· Defrost/Floor Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles.
· Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
through vents under the front seats.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
· Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel and through the outlets located on the
floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the
center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers
can be closed to block airflow.
·
Panel Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
4
ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
· Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to turn on the air conditioning
during manual operation only. When the air con-
ditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will
flow through the outlets selected with the mode control
dial. Press this button a second time to turn off the air
conditioning. An indicator in the button illuminates
when manual compressor operation is selected.
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: To control the air conditioning manually, the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.
· Recirculation Control This button can be used to block out smoke, odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired. The Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. An indicator in the button
illuminates when the Recirculation mode is active. You may use this feature separately.
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, press the recirculation button to return to outside air. Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode.
Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in Section 7 for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In 4
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter The climate control system filters outside air containing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in Section 7 for filter replacement instructions.
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Extremely Cold Weather (Below -20°F Or -29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Engine Block Heater -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . 312 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 315
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual
5
Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
4-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 316
5-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 321
AutoStick -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
AutoStick Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) -- If Equipped . . . . . . 326
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . 338 Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESP/TCS Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 345 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 346 Tires -- General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 353
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Compact Spare Tire -- If Equipped . . . . . . . 353 Limited-Use Spare -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . 354 Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Self-Sealing Tires -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 361 Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Premium System -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 366 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 2.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 3.5L And 5.7L Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 5
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 372 MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 378 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 378 Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . 393
STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
WARNING!
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
· Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
WARNING! (Continued)
· Be sure to turn OFF the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by
inadvertently moving the shift lever. Accidents
can also be caused by pressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause excessive heat in the ex-
haust system, resulting in overheating and vehicle
fire, which may cause serious or fatal injuries.
5
Automatic Transmission The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: · Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop. · Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed. · Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed. · Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Normal Starting
Tip Start
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure.
Extremely Cold Weather (Below -20°F or -29°C) To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
· Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
WARNING! (Continued) · Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery 5
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 for proper jump-starting procedures and follow them carefully.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal starting procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.
After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER -- IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: · Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop. (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
· Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed.
· Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
· Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
General Information The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, dependent upon:
· Altitude
· Vehicle loading
· Driving style
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
· Shift lever position
· Accelerator position
· Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation, and the road characteristics.
NOTE: · After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating, especially when the engine is cold.
· If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first.
· The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break-in period. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before the shift lock will release.
Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied. Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key is removed from the ignition, the transmission shift lever is locked in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle.
Over-Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature, the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in DRIVE position. After the transmission cools down, it will return to normal operation.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK 5
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position, and the brake pedal must be depressed.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access the override, remove the rubber tray from the storage bin
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
located to the right of the shift lever. The override access port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever gate.
Interlock Manual Override To activate the override, first insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON position. Then, press the pink-colored tab through the access port with a
small flat blade screwdriver or alike. While pressing the override, move the shift lever out of the PARK position. When complete, return the rubber tray to its original position.
4-Speed Automatic Transmission
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-6°F (-21°C) and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be briefly limited to only 2nd gear operation. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Gear Ranges
Shift Lever
PARK PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of park. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
5
WARNING!
Never use PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position: · When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the
way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated. · Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the P position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position.
REVERSE Use REVERSE for moving the vehicle rearward. Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE, except when rocking the vehicle.
NEUTRAL The engine may be started in this range.
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.
"D" (Overdrive) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest up shifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy. Select the "3" range when frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers).
NOTE: · If the vehicle is started in cold temperatures, shifts into
Overdrive may be delayed. Normal Overdrive and shifting operation will resume when the temperature of the transmission reaches the appropriate temperature. Refer to the Note under "Torque Converter Clutch" later in this section.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
· If the transmission temperature gets too hot, the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or engage Overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the transmission cools down. After cooldown, Overdrive will resume normal operation.
"3" (Third) This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transmission will operate normally in 1st, 2nd, and 3rd while in
this range. The "3" position should also be used when 5
descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress.
NOTE: Using the "3" range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
"L" (Low) This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than in other gear range selections.
CAUTION!
Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear, and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes. These practices can cause overheating and damage to the transmission.
Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission in this vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
NOTE: · The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm (usually after 13 miles [1.64.8 km] of driving). Because engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is considered a normal condition. Pulling the shift lever into the "3" position will show that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
· If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the transmission fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission. This is considered a normal condition and it will not cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position.
Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause damage, the transmission automatically shifts into second gear. The transmission remains in second gear despite the forward gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. This reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears.
· Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK.
· Turn the key to LOCK, then start the engine.
· Shift into DRIVE and resume driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.
5-Speed Automatic Transmission Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
5
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
Gear Ranges
Shift Lever
PARK PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
WARNING!
Never use PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position: · When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated. · Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the P position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned from the LOCK to ON position.
REVERSE Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
NEUTRAL In NEUTRAL, no power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads).
The engine may be started in this range. Use this range for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed.
5
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.
DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and the best fuel economy.
The transmission automatically upshifts through 5th gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers, use the AutoStick mode and select the "3" range.
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation, you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency.
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode. If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Second gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service. To reset the transmission, use the following procedure:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
3. Turn OFF the engine.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears.
5
Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three times. Follow the reset procedure described under "Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode" in this section. In Permanent Limp Home Mode, PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Second gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may illuminate.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK -- IF EQUIPPED Autostick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle. Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.
Autostick Operation By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position, it can be moved from side to side. This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the shift lever to the left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator.
You can shift in or out of the Autostick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you
choose the Overdrive mode, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between the five available gears. When you wish to engage Autostick, simply move the shift lever to the right or left (D+/D-) while in the DRIVE position. The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) -- IF EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand All Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear wheels as necessary.
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automatically defaults to Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) when road and environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside temperature, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually selected by moving the shift lever into the Autostick mode (+/-) or activating the windshield wipers for an extended period of time.
NOTE: If the "t CASE" or "SERVICE AWD SYSTEM" warning message appears after engine start up, or during driving, it means that the AWD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center" in Section 4 of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size may cause failure of the front differential and/or the transfer case.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
5
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels.
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
CAUTION!
· Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
· Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
5
· Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued) · Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle's drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle's fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. · Getting water inside your vehicle's engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
· Driving through standing water limits your vehicle's traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
· Driving through standing water limits your vehicle's braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
· Getting water inside your vehicle's engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you stranded.
· Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
WARNING! Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
5
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
No chemical flushes should be used in any power steering system; only the approved lubricant may be used.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturer's recommended power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.
PARKING BRAKE The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down and then remove your foot from the pedal. To release the parking brake, push down on the parking brake pedal and then release.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
5
Parking Brake The BRAKE light in the instrument cluster will turn on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is ON. NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
· Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
· Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically "pumps" the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti-Lock:
· The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop),
· The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
· Brake pedal pulsations, and
· A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
· The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
WARNING! (Continued) · Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. · The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af- 5
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. · The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
(Continued)
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) · The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that include ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), TCS (Traction Control System), BAS (Brake Assist System), and ESP (Electronic Stability Program). All four of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to "Anti-Lock Brake System" in Section 5 of this manual.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS) This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
Brake Assist System (BAS) This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency brake maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you 5
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer.
· Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
· Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The ESP/TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active. The ESP/TCS Indicator Light also
flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESP/TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
The ESP system has two available operating modes:
ESP On This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off The "Partial Off" mode is intended for times when a
5
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the
threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESP normally allows.
The ESP OFF switch is located on the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel. To enter the "Partial Off" mode, momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch and the "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" will illuminate. To turn the
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESP on again, momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch and the "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" will turn off.
ESP OFF Switch NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial Off" mode by momentarily depressing the ESP
OFF switch. Once the situation requiring "Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn the ESP on again by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
Synchronizing ESP The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with BAS indicator. If the power supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indica-
tor Light may illuminate with the engine running. If this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right. The ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light should go out. However, if the light remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator. The ESP/ BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESP/ TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. They should go out with the engine running.
The system will turn the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light on continuously while the engine running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles, and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
NOTE: · The ESP/TCS Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS Mal-
function Indicator Light will turn on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
· Each time the ignition switch is turned ON, the ESP system will be on even if it was turned off previously.
· The ESP control system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is NORMAL; the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
5
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings
1 -- U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 -- Size Designation
3 -- Service Description
4 -- Maximum Load
5 -- Maximum Pressure 6 -- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
NOTE: · P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
· European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
· LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
· Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
Tires designed to this standard have the letter "T" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
· High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
Size Designation:
EXAMPLE:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
5
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
-- Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
-- R means radial construction
--D means diagonal or bias construction
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE: 15 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index
-- A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol
-- A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions -- The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: ....blank.... = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire Light Load = Light load tire C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load -- Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure -- Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation
-- This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire 5
safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
--03 means the 3rd week. 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
--01 means the year 2001 -- Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar. Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the: 1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2) total weight your vehicle can carry 3) tire size designed for your vehicle 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.
Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX"
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: · The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
· For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
TIRES -- GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
· Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents.
· Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure.
· Over-inflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
· Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
· Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. · Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side "B" Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the "Supplemental Tire Pressure Information" section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as 5
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always "cold tire inflation pressure." Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
5
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire -- If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Limited-Use Spare -- If Equipped The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limiteduse spare tire warning label located on the limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire, replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point.
Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:
· Driving style
· Tire pressure
· Distance driven
1 -- Worn Tire 2 -- New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on "Tread Wear Indicators"). Refer to the "Tire and Loading Information" placard for the size designation of your tire. The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
WARNING!
· Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
5
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
· Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued) · Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
SELF-SEALING TIRES -- IF EQUIPPED A non-hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0.19 in (5 mm) to minimize the loss of air pressure. This contributes to the safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the probability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire.
TIRE CHAINS Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet SAE type "Class S" specifications. Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain manufacturer. In addition, only install tire chains on P215/65 R17 and P225/60 R18 size tires. The P245/45 R20 size tires do not provide adequate clearance for tire chains.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
CAUTION! (Continued)
· Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use.
· Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
· Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). · Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. · Use on rear wheels only. · Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) · Observe the tire chain manufacturer's instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture.
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and 5
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer's instructions on method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for usage.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear patterns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the "Maintenance Schedules" section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the "Tires General Information" in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects 5
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
· The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
· After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE: · The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
· The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
· Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
· The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
· Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
5
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
· Receiver module,
· Four TPM sensors, and
· TPM Telltale Light
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS. 2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. 3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
NOTE:
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
5
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System -- If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
· Receiver module,
· Four TPM sensors,
· Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
· TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one or more low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all of the tires with low pressure (including those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the TPM Telltale Light will
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for
three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the 5
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash, and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS. 2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and
the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
NOTE:
Vehicles with Compact Spare 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire. 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three
5
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:
· This device may not cause harmful interference.
· This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123 Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.7L Engine The 2.7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded "regular" gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium gasoline is not recom-
mended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
3.5L and 5.7L Engines The 3.5L and 5.7L engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use
of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications, if they are available.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "Reformulated Gasoline." Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and 5
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol, it does not have the negative effects of methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle's warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: · operate in a lean mode · OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on · poor engine performance · poor cold start and cold drivability · increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E-85 perform the following: · change the engine oil and oil filter · disconnect and reconnect the battery · drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
5
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's performance:
· The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
· An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
· The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
· Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
· Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
· Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle. Push in on the left side (near the edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
5
Fuel Filler Door NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door reinforcement.
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
· A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system.
· A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
· To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top off" the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Gas Cap Tether Hook
CAUTION!
· Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap). (Continued)
WARNING!
· Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled.
· Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.
NOTE: · Tighten the gas cap until you hear a "clicking" sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
· When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
"Check Gascap" message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to "Onboard Diagnostic
System" in Section 7.
5
VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the "Vehicle Certification Label." This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver's door.
The label contains the following information: · Name of manufacturer · Month and year of manufacture · Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) · Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front · Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear · Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) · Type of Vehicle · Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately. It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
5
the brakes operate.
NOTE: · Refer to the "Vehicle Certification Label" affixed to the
rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's GVWR and GAWRs.
· Refer to the "Tire Placard" for your vehicle's proper tire pressure.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING In this section, you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs [68 kg] allowance for the presence of a driver.)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW) The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or 5
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
· An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in an accident.
· Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to the "Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)" chart for the Maximum GTW towable for your given drivetrain.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Refer to the "Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)" chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on 5
your vehicle.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt. ( see note)
2.7L & 3.5L Rear Wheel
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Drive (RWD) Automatic
3.5L All Wheel Drive (AWD) & 5.7L Automatic
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the "Tire and Loading Information" placard. Refer to "Tire Safety Information" in this section.
Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
5
Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: · The tongue weight of the trailer. · The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle. · The weight of the driver and all passengers.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the "Tire and Loading Information" placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
· Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle.
· During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident.
· When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
· Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners.
· Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. Always, block or chock the trailer wheels.
· GCWR must not be exceeded.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
· Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the "Tire and Loading Information" placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. 5
(This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements -- Tires
- Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
- Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
"TiresGeneral Information" in this section for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation procedures.
- Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
- Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "TiresGeneral Information" in this section for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper inspection procedure.
- When replacing tires, refer to "TiresGeneral Information" in this section for information on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Brakes
- Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
- An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
- Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements -- Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4- and 7-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
1 -- Female Pins 2 -- Male Pin 3 -- Ground
4-Pin Connector
4 -- Park 5 -- Left Stop/Turn 6 -- Right Stop/Turn
7-Pin Connector
1 -- Battery 2 -- Backup Lamps 3 -- Right Stop/Turn 4 -- Electric Brakes
5 -- Ground 6 -- Left Stop/Turn 7 -- Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Towing Tips -- Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the "3" range should be selected.
NOTE: Using the "3" range while operating the vehicle 5
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the interval specified for "police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing" in the Maintenance Schedule.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips -- Electronic Speed Control (If Equipped)
- Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
- When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
- Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips -- Autostick (If Equipped)
- By using the Autostick modes and selecting a specific gear range, frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear range should be selected that allows for adequate performance. For example, choose "4" if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose "3" or "2" if needed to maintain the desired speed.
- Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
Towing Tips -- Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
- City Driving When stopped for short periods, put transmission in NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
- Highway Driving Reduce speed.
- Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive and All-Wheel Drive Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four wheels are off the ground.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . 398 Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Jacking And Changing a Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 6
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel between the center air outlets.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. When the Hazard Warning flasher switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn off flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
· On the highways -- slow down.
· In city traffic -- while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C removes this heat. You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor, and
the fan control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H," pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the "H," turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the "Cooling System Pressure Cap" paragraph.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
6
WARNING!
· Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued) · Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. · The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack and spare tire.
Opening The Access Panel 3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399
Spare Tire Fastener 4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
6
Jack Fastener
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided.
400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK.
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
6. Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking and Changing a Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: · Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. · Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. · Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
· Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.
· Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. · Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. · If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic. · To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. · Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401
Jack Warning Label 1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with steel wheels, do not remove the
wheel cover at this time. If equipped with aluminum
wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before
6
raising the vehicle.
402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
Center Cap Removal
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges and retention teeth.
Lug Nut Removal/Installation 1 -- Tighten 2 -- Loosen
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped), and tire. Remove the cover by hand. Do not pry it off.
7. Mount the spare tire.
NOTE: For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403
However, when reinstalling the road tire, follow the procedure under "Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation" in place of the remaining steps in this procedure.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jack Engagement Locations
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided.
Compact Spare Tire The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405
· Keep tire inflated to 60 psi (414 KPa) cold inflation pressure.
· This tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) speed.
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
6
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation (If Equipped)
NOTE: Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. For vehicles equipped with wheel covers, perform Steps 2 and 3. For vehicles equipped with center caps, proceed to Step 4.
2. Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs, which are on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground.
Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 -- Valve Stem 2 -- Valve Notch 3 -- Wheel Lug Nut
4 -- Wheel Cover 5 -- Mounting Stud
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to the ground.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407
7. For vehicles equipped with center caps, install the center cap by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the center cap.
8. Stow the jack, tools, and spare tire. Make sure the base of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
6
the places provided.
408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
· Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
· Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
· Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, or clothing. Don't lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
· A battery generates hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes.
· Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12-Volts.
· The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but do not allow the vehicles to touch one another.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409
4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote jump-start positive battery post (+) in the engine compartment. Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the following illustration for jump-starting connections.
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to
6
the following illustration for jump-starting connections.
3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in PARK, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position on both vehicles.
410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jump-Starting 1 -- Engine Ground 2 -- Positive Battery Post
WARNING!
· You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing.
· Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode.
· During cold weather when temperatures are below the freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting because the battery could rupture or explode. The battery temperature must be brought above the freezing point before attempting jump-start.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
NOTE: Refer to Synchronizing ESP under Electronic Stability Program in Section 5 if the ESP/BAS light (in
the instrument cluster) remains on continuously after starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in: · Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent · Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion · Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE and DRIVE. Usually, the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective.
NOTE: Turn OFF the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) -- if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) -- if equipped before rocking the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Stability Program" or "Traction Control System" in Section 5.
6
CAUTION!
· When "rocking" a stuck vehicle by moving between 1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
(Continued)
412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued) · Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and don't let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flatbed towing is recommended. DO NOT tow an AWD vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground unless the rear driveshaft is removed and the transmission is in NEUTRAL.
Vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed (with rear wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL under the following conditions:
· The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
· The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
CAUTION!
Exceeding these towing limits may cause transmission failure.
Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the ground (or the rear driveshaft removed) with no limitation on speed or distance.
CAUTION! · Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the front fascia will result.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413
CAUTION! (Continued)
· If the transmission is not operative or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (24 km),
then the only approved method of towing is with
a flatbed truck. Otherwise, damage to the trans-
mission may result. · Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur. · Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
6
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the key must be in the ON position, not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
Engine Compartment -- 2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Engine Compartment -- 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Engine Compartment -- 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Onboard Diagnostic System -- OBD II . . . . . . 420
Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 7
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers/Headlight Washers -- If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 All Wheel Drive (AWD) -- If Equipped . . . . 443 Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 451 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, Park/Turn Light, Inner Park Light, And Outer Park Light 300 Models . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, And Park/Turn Light 300C . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Backup Light, Side Marker Light, And Tail/Stop Turn Light -- 300 Models . . . . . . . 461
Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Light, And Backup Light -- 300C Models . . . . . . . . . . . 464
License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 470
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 2.7L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
1 -- Integrated Power Module 2 -- Engine Oil Dipstick 3 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 4 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 -- Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
7
6 -- Air Cleaner Filter 7 -- Coolant Pressure Cap 8 -- Engine Oil Fill 9 -- Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post 10 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 3.5L
1 -- Integrated Power Module 2 -- Air Cleaner Filter 3 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 4 -- Coolant Pressure Cap 5 -- Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 -- Engine Oil Fill 8 -- Engine Oil Dipstick 9 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir 10 -- Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post
ENGINE COMPARTMENT -- 5.7L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
1 -- Integrated Power Module 2 -- Coolant Pressure Cap 3 -- Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 4 -- Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 -- Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
7
6 -- Air Cleaner Filter 7 -- Engine Oil Fill 8 -- Engine Oil Dipstick 9 -- Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post 10 -- Washer Fluid Reservoir
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM -- OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "Check Gascap" message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
7
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty.
DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance. However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance. These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level -- 2.7L and 3.5L Engines To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off.
7
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines.
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the "SAFE" range will result in an oil level at the top of the "SAFE" range on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Checking Oil Level -- 5.7L Engine To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level in the "SAFE" range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for information on this system.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) -- 2.7L and 5.7L Engines SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to "Engine Compartment" in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
7
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) -- 3.5L Engine
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures.
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to "Engine Compartment" in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
7
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting.
Battery Location
WARNING!
· Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
· Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.
· Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) · The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
· It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
· If a "fast charger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a "fast charger" to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
· Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other 7
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information.
(Continued)
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued) · The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. To replace the filter, remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove the used filter. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the filter indicate this).
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as
MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield Washers/Headlight Washers -- If
Equipped
The windshield washer and the headlight washer (if
equipped) share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid
reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at
7
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer fluid when the message "Low Washer Fluid" appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.
Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Exhaust Gas" under "Safety Tips" in Section 2.
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle.
NOTE: systems
Intentional can result
tampering with emissions control in civil penalties being assessed
7
against you.
434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this should occur, safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the engine OFF, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter, obtain service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
· Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
· Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
· Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
· When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
· You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
7
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System -- Drain, Flush, and Refill If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals.
Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer's recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for the correct fluid type.
CAUTION!
· Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
· Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) · This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
· The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
· Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below 34°F (37°C) are anticipated.
· Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the 7
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
· The warning words "DO NOT OPEN HOT" on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
· Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- 7
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
· Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
· Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing.
· If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
· Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine, which contains aluminum components.
· Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
· Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean, also.
· Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You wouldn't have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the "FULL" mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for the correct fluid type.
WARNING!
· Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire.
7
· Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
· Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer's recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for the correct fluid type.
· The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the fluid and filter should be changed.
Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturer's recommended transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for the correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) -- If Equipped The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and front differential. The exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks.
Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible. 7
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug to add fluid as required.
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole.
Fluid Changes Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for proper maintenance intervals.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion? Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
· Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
· Stone and gravel impact.
· Insects, tree sap, and tar.
· Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
· Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
· Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
· If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
· Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
· Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
· If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.
· It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.
7
· If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
· If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
· If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
· If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
· Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels' protective finish.
Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth, or MOPAR Satin Select. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
7
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment. This module contains fuses and relays.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
CAUTION!
· When installing the integrated power module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
· When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it 7
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Integrated Power Module
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 1
2
3
4
5 6
7 8
9
Cartridge Mini-
Fuse
Fuse
--
15 Amp
Blue
--
25 Amp
Neutral
--
25 Amp
Neutral
--
25 Amp
Neutral
--
--
--
25 Amp
Neutral
--
--
--
25 Amp
Neutral
--
--
Description
Washer Motor
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Ignition Run/Start
Alternator/EGR Solenoid
-- Ignition Coils/Injectors/ Short Runner Valve -- Starter
--
Cavity 10
11
Cartridge Mini-
Fuse
Fuse
30 Amp -- Pink
30 Amp -- Pink
12 40 Amp -- Green
13 50 Amp -- Red
14 --
--
15 50 Amp -- Red
16 --
--
17 --
--
18 --
--
Description
Windshield Wiper
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valves - If Equipped Radiator Fan
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump Motor - If Equipped -- Radiator Fan
-- -- --
Cavity 19 20 21 22
Cartridge Mini-
Fuse
Fuse
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Description
-- -- -- --
Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center contains fuses and relays.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
Opening The Access Panel
7
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
· When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
· When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity 1
2
3 4
5
6
7
Cartridge Mini-
Fuse
Fuse
60 Amp -- Yellow
40 Amp -- Green
--
--
40 Amp -- Green
30 Amp -- Pink
--
20 Amp
Yellow
--
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Integrated Power Module (IPM) -- Integrated Power Module (IPM) Heated Seats - If Equipped Fuel Pump
Rear Heated Seats - If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
Cav- Cartridge Mini- Description
ity Fuse
Fuse
8
--
15 Amp Blue
Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC)/Wireless Control Module (WCM)/ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
9
--
20 Amp Power Outlet Yellow
10 --
--
--
11 * --
--
--
12 * --
--
--
13 * --
--
--
7
14 --
10 Amp AC Heater Control/
Red
Cluster/Security Module
- If Equipped
15 --
20 Amp Trailer Tow Brake ModYellow ule - If Equipped
16 --
--
--
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity 17
18
19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Cartridge Mini-
Fuse
Fuse
--
20 Amp
Yellow
--
20 Amp
Yellow
--
10 Amp
Red
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cluster
Selectable Power Outlet
Stop Lights
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Cavity 28 29
30
31 32 33 34
Cartridge Mini-
Fuse
Fuse
--
10 Amp
Red
--
5 Amp
Orange
--
10 Amp
Red
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
Description
Ignition Run
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) - If Equipped/ Cluster/Electronic Stability Program (ESP) - If Equipped/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/ STOP LIGHT Switch Door Modules/Power Mirrors/Steering Control Module (SCM) -- -- -- --
Cavity 35
36 37 38
39
Cartridge Mini-
Fuse
Fuse
--
5 Amp
Orange
--
20 Amp
Yellow
--
15 Amp
Blue
--
10 Amp
Red
--
10 Amp
Red
Description
Antenna Module - If Equipped/Power Mirrors/Rain Sensor - If Equipped Hands-Free Phone - If Equipped/Video Monitor - If Equipped/Radio Transmission
Analog Clock/Cargo Light/Satellite Receiver (SDARS) Video - If Equipped/Vehicle Information Module - If Equipped Heated Mirrors - If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
Cav- Cartridge Mini- Description
ity Fuse
Fuse
40 --
5 Amp Orange
Auto Inside Rearview Mirror - If Equipped/ Heated Seats - If Equipped/Switch Bank
41 --
10 Amp Red
AC Heater Control/ Headlights/Park Assist If Equipped/Tire Pressure Monitoring - If Equipped/Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
42 30 Amp -- Pink
Front Blower Motor
7
43 30 Amp -- Pink
Rear Window Defroster
44 20 Amp -- Blue
Amplifier - If Equipped/ Sunroof - If Equipped
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses (circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The cluster, the driver seat switch (if equipped), and the memory module (if equipped) are fused by the 25-Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 11. The passenger seat switch (if equipped) is fused by the 25-Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power window switch, and the passenger power window switch are fused by the 25-Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 13. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your battery.
· Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
· Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Overhead Console Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket / Cupholder
Lighting . . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.
Exterior (300 Models)
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Front Inner Park Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA
Front Outer Park Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA
Front Fog Light--If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . 9145/H10
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Stop/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Rear Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
Center High Mount Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Exterior (300C Models)
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlight (Standard Halogen). . . . . 9006XS
Low Beam Headlight High Intensity Discharge
(HID) . . . . . . . . . . D1S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK
Front Fog Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145/H10
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
7
Tail/Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Tail Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Turn Signal Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757A
Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High Mount Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Outside Mirror Turn Signal & Approach Lights . . . . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, Park/Turn Light, Inner Park Light, and Outer Park Light 300 Models
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise, and then pull it out of the headlight assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb. 4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headlight assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
1 -- High Beam Headlight Bulb 2 -- Low Beam Headlight Bulb
3 -- Park/Turn Light Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
4 -- Inner Park Light Bulb 5 -- Outer Park Light Bulb
7
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, and Park/Turn Light 300C
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) -- If Equipped The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlights when the headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID Headlights, when the headlights are turned on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Backup Light, Side Marker Light, and Tail/Stop Turn Light -- 300 Models
1. Open the Trunk.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the tail light assembly. 5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side. 6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
7
7. Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to access the bulbs.
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly.
1 -- Backup Light Bulb
2 -- Side Marker Light Bulb
3 -- Tail/Stop/Turn Light Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
9. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb. 10. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail light assembly, and then turn it clockwise. 11. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, electrical connector, and trunk liner. 12. Close the trunk.
7
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tail/Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Light, and Backup Light -- 300C Models
1. Open the Trunk.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the tail light assembly.
4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the tail light assembly.
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Pull back the trunk liner.
7. Pull the tail light assembly clear from the vehicle to access the bulbs. Turn bulb sockets counterclockwise to remove.
8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
2 -- Tail Light Bulb
7
1 -- Tail/Stop Light Bulb
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3 -- Turn Signal Light Bulb
4 -- Backup Light Bulb
9. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb. 10. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail light assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
11. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, electrical connector, and trunk liner. 12. Close the trunk. License Light
1. Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia. 2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly. 3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
1 -- License Light Bulb 2 -- Socket
7
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the light to the rear fascia, and then install the screws.
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate) 2.7 Liter Engine 3.5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive 3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive 5.7 Liter Engine Engine Oil with Filter 2.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 3.5 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
U.S.
18 Gallons 18 Gallons 19 Gallons 19 Gallons
6.0 Quarts 6.0 Quarts 7.0 Quarts
Metric
68 Liters 68 Liters 72 Liters 72 Liters
5.7 Liters 5.7 Liters 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
2.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
3.5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive (MOPAR Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive (MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System (MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System (MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
9.9 Quarts 11.1 Quarts 11.4 Quarts 14.7 Quarts 15.1 Quarts
9.4 Liters 10.5 Liters 10.8 Liters 13.9 Liters 14.3 Liters
7
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine Component Engine Coolant Engine Oil (2.7L Engine)
Engine Oil (3.5L Engine)
Engine Oil (5.7L Engine)
Spark Plugs (2.7L Engine) Spark Plugs (3.5L Engine) Spark Plugs (5.7L Engine)
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for correct SAE grade.
TE10MCC5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
ZFR5LP13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
LZFR5C11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Component Oil Filter (2.7L, 3.5L, and 5.7L Engines) Fuel Selection (2.7L Engine) Fuel Selection (3.5L and 5.7L Engines) Chassis Component Automatic Transmission Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Front Axle Rear Axle Transfer Case
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part MOPAR Engine Oil Filter (P/N 04884899AB) or equivalent
87 Octane 87 Octane Acceptable -- 89 Octane Recommended
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
7
MOPAR Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
API GL-5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent
API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent
MOPAR (P/N 68049954AA) BW 4440 Transfer Case Lubricant
M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
I N
T
E
N
CONTENTS
A N
C
Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 474
E Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 476
S
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 474 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A
I N
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
T The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
E must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
N A
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
N system. These and all other maintenance services in-
C cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
E vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
S tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
H E
driving.
D U
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
L malfunction is suspected.
E S NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
8 sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles, "Oil Change Required" will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, "Change Oil" will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE: · The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
· Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
· Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under "Oil Change Required" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 475 M A
(EVIC)" in Section 4 or under "Odometer/Trip Odom-
I N
eter" under "Instrument Cluster Descriptions" in Sec- T
tion 4.
E
N
At Each Stop for Fuel
A
N
· Check the engine oil level. Refer to "Engine Oil" under C
"Maintenance Procedures" in Section 7.
E
· Check
the
windshield
washer
solvent
and
add
if
S C
required.
H
E
Once a Month
D
· Check
tire
pressure
and look
for unusual
wear or
U L
damage.
E
S
· Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals 8
as required.
M 476 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A
I N
· Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
T master cylinder, power steering, and transmission,
E and add as needed.
N
A · Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
N C
operation.
E At Each Oil Change
S C
· Change the engine oil filter.
H E
· Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
D
U
L
E
S
8
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 477 M A
I
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
N
Schedule
T
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
E N A N
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
E
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
S
12 months.
C
Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
H E D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
M 478 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A
I
N 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
T 18 Months Maintenance
E N
Service Schedule
A Change the engine oil and engine oil
N
filter.
C Rotate tires.
E Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the
front axle fluid -- All Wheel Drive
S C
(AWD).
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Inspect the CV joints. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires. Replace the engine air cleaner filter. Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and
5.7L Engines). Inspect the transfer case fluid -- All
Wheel Drive (AWD). Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 479 M A
I
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
N
Schedule
T
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
E N A N
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
E
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid -- All Wheel Drive (AWD).
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
M 480 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A
I
N 42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
T 42 Months Maintenance
E N
Service Schedule
A Change the engine oil and engine oil
N
filter.
C Rotate tires.
E
S C H E D U L E S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Inspect the CV joints. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary. Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires. Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the
front axle fluid -- All Wheel Drive (AWD).
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 481 M A
I
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
N
Schedule
T
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
E N A N
Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and 5.7L Engines).
C
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
E
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
S
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
C
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
H E D
fleet, or frequent trailer towing -- All Wheel Drive (AWD). Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles
U L
(170 000 km).
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
M 482 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A
I
N 66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
T 66 Months Maintenance
E N
Service Schedule
A Change the engine oil and engine oil
N
filter.
C Rotate tires.
E
S C H E D U L E S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid -- All Wheel Drive (AWD). Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Inspect the CV joints. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires. If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 483 M A I N T E N A N C E
S C H E D U L E S
8
M 484 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A
I
N 90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
T Schedule
E N A N
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
C Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and 5.7L Engines).
E Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid -- All Wheel Drive (AWD).
S Inspect the transfer case fluid -- All Wheel Drive (AWD).
C Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Inspect the CV joints. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary. Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 485 M A
I
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or N
102 Months Maintenance
T
Service Schedule
E N
Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N
Rotate tires.
C
Replace the spark plugs (3.5L
E
Engines).
Replace the timing belt (3.5L Engine). Flush and replace the engine coolant if
S C H
not done at 60 months.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
M 486 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A
I
N 108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
T Schedule
E N A N
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
C
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
E Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid -- All Wheel Drive (AWD).
S Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. Replace the engine air cleaner filter. Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and 5.7L Engines). Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. Inspect the CV joints. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary. Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing -- All Wheel Drive (AWD). Replace the accessory drive belt (2.7L/3.5L Engines).
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 487 M A
I
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or N
126 Months Maintenance
T
Service Schedule
E N
Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N
Rotate tires.
C
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the
E
front axle fluid -- All Wheel Drive
(AWD).
S C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
M 488 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A
I
N 132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or
T 132 Months Maintenance
E N
Service Schedule
A Change the engine oil and engine oil
N
filter.
C Rotate tires.
E If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
S C H E
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. Replace the air conditioning filter (if
D
equipped)
U Inspect the brake linings; replace if
L
necessary.
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Rotate tires. If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. Inspect the CV joints. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary. Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 489 M A
I 150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or N
150 Months Maintenance
T
Service Schedule
E N
Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N
Rotate tires.
C
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
E
Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and
5.7L Engines). Inspect the transfer case fluid -- All
S C H
Wheel Drive (AWD). Adjust parking brake on vehicles
E D
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Date
Repair Order #
Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
M 490 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES A
I N
This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
T to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
E warranty.
N
A N
WARNING!
C
E You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
S C
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
H have any doubt about your ability to perform a
E service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
D U
chanic.
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Chrysler LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . 494 Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 494 In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 496
MOPAR Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 9
In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
492 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment If you're having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 493
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know you and the vehicle best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is 9
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
494 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer's service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.
· If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
· If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:
· Owner's name and address
· Owner's telephone number (home and office)
· Authorized dealership name
· Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
· Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler LLC Customer Center P.O. Box 218004 Auburn Hills, MI 483218004 Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 4652001
In Mexico contact: Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D. F. In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1800380CHRY.
Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 495
have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You'll be pleased with their
9
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
496 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle.
MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 18883274236 (TTY: 1800424
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash-
ington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information
about
motor
vehicle
safety
from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to: Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 497
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
· Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, 9
and charts.
498 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
· Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
· Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
· 18008904038 (U.S.)
· 18003871143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
· www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 499
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
9
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
500 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
502 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . 154 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 437 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 427 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294,296 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303,430 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429,430 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . 294,296,297,429 Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217,351 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,61
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,63,77,212 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,59 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,59 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,216 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,443 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 436,437,468
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,336 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 18 Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,31 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 209,225 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 297 Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 316,321,442,443
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443,471 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,322 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,321
INDEX 503
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321,324,325 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409,428
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,77 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 10
504 INDEX
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441,471 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 75 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456,458 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,456
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,374 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,293 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,67,70,72 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,239,253,257,266 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 276 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 438
INDEX 505
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435,439 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 436,468,470
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 150,154 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,448 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 10
506 INDEX
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,295,301 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,424 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 DVD Player (Video Entertainment SystemTM) . . . . 288
Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . 449 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . 150,154 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 216
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 220 Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 421,474 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,418,419 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,424 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,418,419 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435,470 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
INDEX 507
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,374 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,468,470 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,225,424 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,468 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 62 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 10
508 INDEX
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,374,433 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,432 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303,430 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,470 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Flashers Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,141,208
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Flat Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,424 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 470 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,208 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,470 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
INDEX 509
Gauges Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,322 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,26,118,174,370 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378,380 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378,380 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,420 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 10
510 INDEX
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 142 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,145 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 142
Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 181 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,13
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66 Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206,208 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
INDEX 511
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70 Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,456 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,136
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,63,77,212 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 10
512 INDEX
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456,458 Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,181 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,142 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 341 Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 216 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,208 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,460 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 137,145 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,215 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,208 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,181 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Low Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 219 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,181 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . 143 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,181 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456,458 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 219 SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 217,361 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,140,141,208 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 208 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377,379 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,70 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
INDEX 513
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 219,421 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142,181 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 10
514 INDEX
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422,496 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,470 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,215
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,215 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,225 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,225 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,470
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,225,424 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,424 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423,424 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426,470 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,468 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,468 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420,421 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214,396 Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,497
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 346 Power
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 449,451
INDEX 515
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 191 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331,332 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 148 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 438 10
516 INDEX
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Radio, Satellite (uconnect gps) . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,288 Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Remote Control Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 291 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 209,225 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Satellite Radio (uconnect studios) . . . . . . . . . . 282,288 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,42,77
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 46 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65,66,67,72 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,43
INDEX 517
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 10
518 INDEX
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 436,470 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Self-Sealing Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,239,253,257,266 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,316,321 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,59
Side Curtain (Window Airbag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,141,208 Sirius Backseat TVTM (uconnect studios) . . . . . . . . 288 Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Sound System
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353,354,398 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 150,154 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,309 Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331,332 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,148 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,148 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195,456 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303,456 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
INDEX 519
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 51 Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,148 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 297 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 214,397 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147,148 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 346 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,350,498 10
520 INDEX
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397,400 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342,350 Self-Sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 393 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443,471 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,316,321,442 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317,322 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
INDEX 521
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . 181 Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,215 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,40 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,208
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 uconnect (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 276 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 10
522 INDEX
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,377,379 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303,456 Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18 Video Entertainment SystemTM (Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,431 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,190 Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,59 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78,295,301 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,145
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle's electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle's electronic systems.
Chrysler LLC 81-026-0943
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)